WO2021020631A1 - Mobile terminal - Google Patents

Mobile terminal Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021020631A1
WO2021020631A1 PCT/KR2019/009605 KR2019009605W WO2021020631A1 WO 2021020631 A1 WO2021020631 A1 WO 2021020631A1 KR 2019009605 W KR2019009605 W KR 2019009605W WO 2021020631 A1 WO2021020631 A1 WO 2021020631A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
bodies
mobile terminal
stopper
blocks
hinge
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2019/009605
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
김지훈
이민하
이응봉
홍병용
Original Assignee
엘지전자 주식회사
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 엘지전자 주식회사 filed Critical 엘지전자 주식회사
Priority to PCT/KR2019/009605 priority Critical patent/WO2021020631A1/en
Publication of WO2021020631A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021020631A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02Constructional features of telephone sets

Definitions

  • the present application relates to a mobile terminal, and to a foldable mobile terminal configured to adjust the size of an available display or screen.
  • Terminals can be divided into mobile/portable terminals and stationary terminals depending on whether they can be moved. Again, mobile terminals can be divided into handheld terminals and vehicle mounted terminals depending on whether the user can directly carry them.
  • the functions of mobile terminals are diversifying. For example, there are functions of data and voice communication, taking pictures and videos through a camera, recording voice, playing music files through a speaker system, and outputting images or videos to the display unit. Some terminals add an electronic game play function or perform a multimedia player function. In particular, recent mobile terminals can receive multicast signals providing visual content such as broadcasting and video or television programs. In order to perform such extended functions, the mobile terminal is basically connected to other devices or networks using various communication protocols, and provides a user with ubiquitous computing. That is, mobile terminals have evolved into smart devices that enable connectivity to a network and always-on computing.
  • the mobile terminal may be configured to have a foldable body that can be folded or unfolded, and the flexible display may be installed on such a body. Accordingly, when the body is folded or unfolded, the flexible display can also be folded or unfolded, and the mobile terminal can have a display or screen that can be adjusted in size.
  • a mechanical mechanism such as a hinge is required.
  • the mechanical mechanism has a complex and large size for smooth folding and unfolding of the mobile terminal body. Therefore, the mechanical mechanism for the foldable structure increases the size of the mobile terminal and may place many restrictions on the design of the mobile terminal.
  • An object of the present application is to provide a mobile terminal having a simple and compact foldable mechanism.
  • Another object of the present application is to provide a mobile terminal having a foldable mechanism that performs smooth folding and unfolding.
  • the present application includes a first body including a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface; A second body provided rotatably on the first body and including a third surface and a fourth surface opposite to the third surface;
  • the first and second bodies are coupled, and the first and second bodies are rotated in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces are close to each other, and the second and fourth surfaces are close to each other.
  • a hinge configured to rotate the first and second bodies in third and fourth directions, respectively; And provided over the first and third surfaces, the first and second bodies are exposed to the outside when the second and fourth surfaces rotate to face each other, and the first and second bodies are exposed to the first and second bodies. It is possible to provide a mobile terminal including a display configured to be hidden when the third surfaces rotate to face each other.
  • Adjacent side portions of the first and second bodies may be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval, and the hinge may be disposed between the side portions of the first and second bodies.
  • the hinge includes: a block assembly including a plurality of blocks extending in the longitudinal direction of the first and second bodies and arranged in parallel with each other; And a link assembly provided at ends of the blocks and configured to connect the blocks to each other.
  • Each of the blocks may include a body configured to support the display and axes extending from both ends of the body.
  • the block assembly When the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the second and fourth sides are close, the block assembly may be configured to retract, and for this purpose, the blocks are configured to reduce the spacing between them. I can. In addition, when the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the first and third surfaces become close, the block assembly may be configured to expand, and for this purpose, the blocks increase the spacing therebetween. Can be configured. In more detail, each of the blocks may have a cross section that gradually decreases while extending toward the second and fourth surfaces.
  • the link assembly includes: a first link connecting a pair of blocks adjacent to each other; And a second link connecting two pairs of blocks disposed adjacent to each other while being connected by the first link, respectively.
  • the hinge is configured to be movable between the first and second bodies, and moving the first and second bodies in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other. It may further include a stopper (stopper) configured to allow selectively. The stopper may be selectively configured to be interposed between the blocks.
  • the stopper When the stopper is interposed between the blocks, it may be configured to prevent the first and second bodies from rotating in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other. In addition, when the stopper is not interposed between the blocks, it may allow the first and second bodies to rotate in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other.
  • the hinge may further include a holder configured to guide the movement of the stopper.
  • the hinge may further include an interlock mechanism connected to the first and second bodies and configured to interlock the rotation of the first and second bodies and the movement of the stopper.
  • the interlocking mechanism may be configured to interpose the stopper between the blocks when the first and second bodies are rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces face each other.
  • the interlocking mechanism may be configured to withdraw the stopper from the blocks when the first and second bodies are rotated so that the first and third surfaces face each other.
  • the interlocking mechanism may consist of a gear train configured to linearly reciprocate the stopper. More specifically, the interlocking mechanism includes: a first gear connected to the first or second body and configured to rotate together when the first or second body rotates; A second gear meshed with the first gear and the stopper, respectively, and rotating by the rotation of the first gear to move the stopper.
  • the stopper may include a rack gear meshed with the second gear for linear reciprocating motion.
  • the interlocking mechanism may further include a lever connected to the first gear and slidably coupled to the first or second body.
  • the interlocking mechanism may further include a bracket provided on the first or second body and slidably receiving the lever.
  • the hinge includes a plurality of rotatable blocks, and accordingly, may be deformed to have a predetermined curvature so as to rotate the first and second bodies in a desired direction. Accordingly, this first hinge can have an intended function, that is, the rotation of the first and second bodies while having a simple and compact structure.
  • the hinge may include an interlocking mechanism for linking the rotation of the bodies of the mobile terminal and the movement of a stopper disposed between the bodies.
  • the stopper is optionally arranged between the blocks by means of the interlocking mechanism, thereby enabling the rotation of the bodies for the intended state of the mobile terminal.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of a mobile terminal according to the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state according to the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state.
  • FIG. 4 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in an unfolded state according to the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
  • FIG. 6 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state opposite to the mobile terminal of FIGS. 2 and 3.
  • FIG. 7 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
  • FIG 8 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state.
  • FIG. 9 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state in the opposite direction.
  • FIG. 10 is a rear view showing a hinge of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view and a front view showing a block of the hinge.
  • FIG. 12 is a front view and a perspective view showing a first link of the hinge.
  • FIG. 13 is a front view and a perspective view showing a second link of the hinge.
  • FIG. 14 is a front view and a perspective view showing a holder of the hinge.
  • 15 is a perspective view and a front view showing a stopper of the hinge.
  • 16 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
  • 17 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in a folded state.
  • FIG. 18 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in a folded state in the opposite direction.
  • 19 is a rear view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
  • 20 is a perspective view showing in detail the linkage mechanism and the hinge.
  • 21 and 22 are side views each showing a modified block and a stopper.
  • Embodiments described in this specification include configurations for applying a flexible display to a mobile terminal.
  • the principles and configurations of the described embodiments can be equally applied to all display devices using the flexible display.
  • the following embodiments are shown and described based on a mobile terminal, but can be applied to all computing devices having a foldable structure, for example, laptop computers, tablets, and various smart devices other than a mobile terminal without substantial modification. I can.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of a mobile terminal according to the present application.
  • the mobile terminal 100 includes a wireless communication unit 110, an input unit 120, a sensing unit 140, an output unit 150, an interface unit 160, a memory 170, a control unit 180, and a power supply unit 190. ), etc. Since the components shown in FIG. 1 are not essential for implementing a mobile terminal, the mobile terminal described in the present specification may have more or fewer components than the components listed above.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 may be configured between the mobile terminal 100 and the wireless communication system, between the mobile terminal 100 and another mobile terminal 100, or between the mobile terminal 100 and an external server. It may include one or more modules to enable wireless communication between. In addition, the wireless communication unit 110 may include one or more modules for connecting the mobile terminal 100 to one or more networks.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 may include at least one of a broadcast reception module 111, a mobile communication module 112, a wireless Internet module 113, a short-range communication module 114, and a location information module 115. .
  • the broadcast reception module 111 of the wireless communication unit 110 receives a broadcast signal and/or broadcast-related information from an external broadcast management server through a broadcast channel.
  • the broadcast channel may include a satellite channel and a terrestrial channel.
  • Two or more broadcast receiving modules may be provided to the mobile terminal 100 for simultaneous broadcast reception or broadcast channel switching of at least two broadcast channels.
  • the mobile communication module 112 includes technical standards or communication methods for mobile communication (eg, GSM (Global System for Mobile communication), CDMA (Code Division Multi Access), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multi Access 2000)), EV -DO (Enhanced Voice-Data Optimized or Enhanced Voice-Data Only), WCDMA (Wideband CDMA), HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advanced), etc.), transmits and receives radio signals with at least one of a base station, an external terminal, and a server on a mobile communication network.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multi Access
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multi Access 2000
  • EV -DO Enhanced Voice-Data Optimized or Enhanced Voice-Data Only
  • WCDMA Wideband CDMA
  • HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access
  • HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access
  • LTE Long Term
  • the wireless signal may include a voice call signal, a video call signal, or various types of data according to transmission/reception of text/multimedia messages.
  • the wireless Internet module 113 refers to a module for wireless Internet access, and may be built-in or external to the mobile terminal 100.
  • the wireless Internet module 113 is configured to transmit and receive wireless signals in a communication network according to wireless Internet technologies.
  • wireless Internet technologies include WLAN (Wireless LAN), Wi-Fi (Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) Direct, DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance), WiBro (Wireless Broadband), WiMAX (World Interoperability for Microwave Access), HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advanced), etc., and the wireless Internet module ( 113) transmits and receives data according to at least one wireless Internet technology in a range including Internet technologies not listed above.
  • the wireless Internet module 113 performs wireless Internet access through the mobile communication network.
  • the short range communication module 114 is for short range communication, and includes BluetoothTM, Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Infrared Data Association (IrDA), Ultra Wideband (UWB), ZigBee, and NFC. Near field communication may be supported by using at least one of (Near Field Communication), Wi-Fi (Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi Direct, and Wireless USB (Wireless Universal Serial Bus) technologies.
  • the short-distance communication module 114 is, between the mobile terminal 100 and a wireless communication system, between the mobile terminal 100 and another mobile terminal 100, or between the mobile terminal 100 through a wireless area network (Wireless Area Networks). ) And a network in which another mobile terminal 100 or an external server is located may support wireless communication.
  • the local area wireless communication network may be a wireless personal area network (Wireless Personal Area Networks).
  • the location information module 115 is a module for obtaining a location (or current location) of a mobile terminal, and representative examples thereof include a GPS (Global Positioning System) module or a WiFi (Wireless Fidelity) module.
  • a GPS Global Positioning System
  • WiFi Wireless Fidelity
  • the mobile terminal may acquire the location of the mobile terminal based on information of the Wi-Fi module and a wireless access point (AP) that transmits or receives a wireless signal.
  • AP wireless access point
  • the location information module 115 may perform any function among other modules of the wireless communication unit 110 in order to obtain data on the location of the mobile terminal as a substitute or additionally.
  • the location information module 115 is a module used to obtain the location (or current location) of the mobile terminal, and is not limited to a module that directly calculates or obtains the location of the mobile terminal.
  • the input unit 120 includes a camera 121 or an image input unit for inputting an image signal, a microphone 122 for inputting an audio signal, or an audio input unit, and a user input unit 123 for receiving information from a user, for example, , A touch key, a mechanical key, etc.).
  • the voice data or image data collected by the input unit 120 may be analyzed and processed as a user's control command.
  • the camera 121 processes an image frame such as a still image or a video obtained by an image sensor in a video call mode or a photographing mode.
  • the processed image frame may be displayed on the display unit 151 or stored in the memory 170.
  • a plurality of cameras 121 provided in the mobile terminal 100 may be arranged to form a matrix structure, and through the camera 121 forming a matrix structure as described above, various angles or focal points are applied to the mobile terminal 100.
  • a plurality of image information may be input.
  • the plurality of cameras 121 may be arranged in a stereo structure to obtain a left image and a right image for implementing a stereoscopic image.
  • the microphone 122 processes an external sound signal into electrical voice data.
  • the processed voice data may be variously utilized according to a function (or an application program being executed) being executed by the mobile terminal 100.
  • the microphone 122 may be implemented with various noise removal algorithms for removing noise generated in a process of receiving an external sound signal.
  • the user input unit 123 is for receiving information from the user, and when information is input through the user input unit 123, the controller 180 can control the operation of the mobile terminal 100 to correspond to the input information.
  • the user input unit 123 is a mechanical (mechanical) input means (or a mechanical key, for example, a button located on the front, rear or side of the mobile terminal 100, a dome switch (dome switch), a jog wheel, Jog switch, etc.) and a touch-type input means.
  • the touch-type input means comprises a virtual key, a soft key, or a visual key displayed on a touch screen through software processing, or a portion other than the touch screen It may be made of a touch key (touch key) disposed on.
  • the virtual key or visual key can be displayed on the touch screen while having various forms, for example, graphic, text, icon, video, or these It can be made of a combination of.
  • the sensing unit 140 may include one or more sensors for sensing at least one of information in the mobile terminal, information on surrounding environments surrounding the mobile terminal, and user information.
  • the sensing unit 140 includes a proximity sensor 141, an illumination sensor 142, a touch sensor, an acceleration sensor, a magnetic sensor, and gravity.
  • G-sensor for example, camera (see 121)), microphone (microphone, see 122), battery gauge, environmental sensor (for example, barometer, hygrometer, thermometer, radiation detection sensor, It may include at least one of a heat sensor, a gas sensor, etc.), and a chemical sensor (eg, an electronic nose, a healthcare sensor, a biometric sensor, etc.).
  • the mobile terminal disclosed in the present specification may combine and utilize information sensed by at least two or more of these sensors.
  • the output unit 150 is for generating an output related to visual, auditory or tactile sense, and includes at least one of the display unit 151, the sound output unit 152, the hap tip module 153, and the light output unit 154 can do.
  • the display unit 151 may implement a touch screen by forming a layer structure or integrally with the touch sensor. Such a touch screen can function as a user input unit 123 that provides an input interface between the mobile terminal 100 and a user, and can provide an output interface between the mobile terminal 100 and a user.
  • the sound output unit 152 may output audio data received from the wireless communication unit 110 or stored in the memory 170 in a call signal reception, a call mode or a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast reception mode, and the like.
  • the sound output unit 152 also outputs sound signals related to functions (eg, a call signal reception sound, a message reception sound, etc.) performed in the mobile terminal 100.
  • the sound output unit 152 may include a receiver, a speaker, and a buzzer.
  • the haptic module 153 generates various tactile effects that a user can feel.
  • a typical example of the tactile effect generated by the haptic module 153 may be vibration.
  • the intensity and pattern of vibrations generated by the haptic module 153 may be controlled by a user's selection or setting of a controller.
  • the haptic module 153 may synthesize and output different vibrations or sequentially output them.
  • the light output unit 154 outputs a signal for notifying the occurrence of an event using light from a light source of the mobile terminal 100.
  • Examples of events occurring in the mobile terminal 100 may include message reception, call signal reception, missed call, alarm, schedule notification, email reception, and information reception through an application.
  • the interface unit 160 serves as a passage between various types of external devices connected to the mobile terminal 100.
  • the interface unit 160 connects a wired/wireless headset port, an external charger port, a wired/wireless data port, a memory card port, and a device equipped with an identification module. It may include at least one of a port, an audio input/output (I/O) port, an input/output (video I/O) port, and an earphone port.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may perform appropriate control related to the connected external device in response to the connection of the external device to the interface unit 160.
  • the memory 170 stores data supporting various functions of the mobile terminal 100.
  • the memory 170 may store a plurality of application programs or applications driven by the mobile terminal 100, data for operation of the mobile terminal 100, and commands. At least some of these application programs may be downloaded from an external server through wireless communication. In addition, at least some of these application programs may exist on the mobile terminal 100 from the time of delivery for basic functions of the mobile terminal 100 (eg, incoming calls, outgoing functions, message reception, and outgoing functions). Meanwhile, the application program may be stored in the memory 170, installed on the mobile terminal 100, and driven by the controller 180 to perform an operation (or function) of the mobile terminal.
  • the controller 180 In addition to the operation related to the application program, the controller 180 generally controls the overall operation of the mobile terminal 100.
  • the controller 180 may provide or process appropriate information or functions to a user by processing signals, data, information, etc. input or output through the above-described components or by driving an application program stored in the memory 170.
  • the controller 180 may include a processor and other electronic components supporting the processor. These processors and electronic components may be mounted on a circuit board to function as the controller 180.
  • controller 180 may control at least some of the components described with reference to FIG. 1 in order to drive the application program stored in the memory 170. Furthermore, in order to drive the application program, the controller 180 may operate by combining at least two or more of the components included in the mobile terminal 100 with each other.
  • the power supply unit 190 receives external power and internal power under the control of the controller 180 and supplies power to each of the components included in the mobile terminal 100.
  • the power supply unit 190 includes a battery 191, and the battery may be a built-in battery or a replaceable battery.
  • At least some of the respective components may operate in cooperation with each other to implement an operation, control, or control method of a mobile terminal according to various embodiments described below.
  • the operation, control, or control method of the mobile terminal may be implemented on the mobile terminal by driving at least one application program stored in the memory 170.
  • FIG. 2 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state according to the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state
  • FIG. 4 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in an unfolded state according to the present application
  • FIG. 5 is a rear view illustrating the mobile terminal in an unfolded state
  • 6 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state opposite to the mobile terminal of FIGS. 2 and 3.
  • FIGS. 2(a), 2(b), (c) and 2(d) show the front, both sides, and the bottom of the folded mobile terminal 100, respectively
  • FIG. 4(a) , FIGS. 4(b), (c) and 4(d) show the front, both sides, and the bottom of the unfolded mobile terminal 100, respectively
  • FIGS. 6(a), 6(b), (c) and 6(d) show the front, both sides, and the bottom of the mobile terminal 100 folded in the opposite direction, respectively.
  • the mobile terminal 100 needs to include two portions that move relative to each other in order to be folded or unfolded. Therefore, as shown, the mobile terminal 100 may include two bodies that are basically separated from each other and independent, that is, first and second bodies 101 and 102 in order to have a foldable structure. have. In addition, in order to be folded or unfolded, these first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be configured to be rotatable relative to each other.
  • the first body 101 may have various shapes, for example, as shown, may have a rectangular shape.
  • the first body 101 may include a housing including a predetermined inner space, and various parts described in FIG. 1 may be installed or accommodated in the housing.
  • the second body 102 may be provided to the first body 101 so as to be rotatable. That is, the second body 102 may be rotatably connected or coupled to the first body 101, and thus may be configured to rotate relative to the first body 101 (thus).
  • the first body 101 may be rotatably connected or coupled to the second body 102, and thus may be configured to rotate with respect to the second body 102. That is, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be configured to be relatively rotatable with respect to each other.
  • the second body 102 may have various shapes like the first body 101, and among these shapes, the second body 102 may have the same shape, that is, corresponding to the first body 101.
  • the mobile terminal 100 has a single body when the mobile terminal 100 is folded. It can form the same appearance.
  • the second body 102 may also have a rectangular shape corresponding to the first body 102.
  • the second body 102 like the first body 102, may include a housing including a predetermined internal space, and various parts described in FIG. 1 may be installed or accommodated in this housing. .
  • the first body 101 may include a first surface 101a among several surfaces thereof and a second surface 101b disposed opposite to the first surface 101a.
  • the second body 102 may likewise include a third surface 102a of several surfaces thereof and a fourth surface 102b disposed opposite thereto.
  • the first side 101a may be configured to be close to or face the third side 102a of the second body 102, while the second side 101b thereof is arranged opposite to the first side 101a. Due to this, it may be configured to face or be close to the fourth surface 102b of the second body 102.
  • the second body when the mobile terminal 100 is folded or unfolded, that is, when the second body 102 rotates relative to the first body 101 in directions R2 and R4 facing each other, the second body ( The third side 102a of 102) may be configured to be close to or facing the first side 101a of the first body 101, whereas the fourth side 102b thereof is on the third side 102a. Due to the opposite arrangement, it may be configured to face or close to the second surface 101b of the first body 102.
  • the relative orientation of the surfaces 101a, 101b, 102a, and 102b can be achieved by controlling the rotation of the first and second bodies 102, and the rotation of these bodies 102 is hinged to be described later. It is made possible by 200.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are close to each other and face each other, and on the other hand (alternatively) the bodies 101 and 102 are
  • the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may be rotated to be close to each other or to face each other.
  • This hinge 200 will be described later with reference to the related drawings following the description of the bodies 101 and 102.
  • the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may constitute the external shape of the mobile terminal 100 when the mobile terminal 100 is folded or unfolded to either side.
  • the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are The front and rear surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 may be formed, respectively.
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 when the mobile terminal 100 is in an unfolded state, that is, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are oriented in the same plane (flush), the The first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may constitute one and the same plane.
  • the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may be hidden in the mobile terminal 100 as shown in FIG. 6 when the mobile terminal 100 is folded to the other side.
  • the second and fourth surfaces 101a and 102a are The external appearance of the mobile terminal 100 can be configured, and the front and rear surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 can be formed, respectively.
  • the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may constitute one and the same plane.
  • the mobile terminal 100 of FIGS. 2 and 4 folded to expose the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are hidden in the mobile terminal 100. I can.
  • a display 151 may be provided on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a.
  • a single display 151 extends long and continuously over these first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, thereby providing a fairly large screen.
  • the first body 101 may include a first seat (101e) (seat) formed on the first surface (101a)
  • the second body ( 102) may include a second seat portion 102e formed on the third surface 102a.
  • the first and second seats 101e and 102e are formed of recesses, and are connected to each other to form one large seat. Accordingly, the elongated display 151 can be stably accommodated in the first and second seat portions 101e and 102e.
  • the display 151 is provided on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, when the mobile terminal 100 is unfolded, as shown in FIG. 4, it is unfolded together and a large screen can be provided to the user. .
  • the display 151 is folded together with the first and second bodies 101 and 102 as shown in FIG. After that, it is still exposed to the outside of the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the display 151 may be functionally and structurally divided into a part located on the first surface 101a and a part located on the third surface 102a, and accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be divided into two reduced screens.
  • the display 151 is similarly formed with the first and second bodies 101 and 102 as shown in FIG. 6. It is folded, but can be hidden in the mobile terminal 100, contrary to that shown in FIG. 2. However, in this case, since the display 151 is hidden, information cannot be provided until the user opens the mobile terminal 100. For this reason, even when the mobile terminal 100 is folded so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other, the mobile terminal 100 is shown in FIGS. 2, 5 and 6 to provide predetermined information to the user. As shown, it may include an auxiliary display 151a.
  • the auxiliary display 151a may be provided on any one of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b exposed when the mobile terminal 100 is folded so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. .
  • the auxiliary display 151a may be disposed on the fourth surface 102b of the second body 102 as shown.
  • first body 101 may have both side portions 101c and 101d, as well illustrated in FIG. 4.
  • second body 102 may likewise have both side portions 102c and 102d.
  • the side portions 101c and 102c may be disposed adjacent to each other at all times, and the other side portions 101d and 102d may be adjacent to or separated from each other depending on the state of the mobile terminal 100, that is, a folded state and an unfolded state. have.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be connected so as to be relatively rotatable with each other at the side portions 101c and 102c that are always adjacent to each other among these side portions as an example.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may include a hinge 200 as such a mechanical connection mechanism.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance at the side portions 101c and 102c adjacent to each other to accommodate the hinge 200, and the hinges 200 are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. It is disposed between the side portions 101c and 102c and can connect the bodies 101 and 102 to be rotatable.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may have a folded state, that is, a first state.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may face or contact each other, and the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may also face each other. Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 may have a reduced size and appearance.
  • the display 151 may be disposed on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a facing each other while being folded. 2 and 3, since the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a can form the front and rear surfaces of the mobile terminal 100, the mobile terminal 151 is substantially It may have divided displays 151 disposed on both the front and rear surfaces.
  • the first state since the first and second bodies 101 and 102 face each other or are in contact with each other, the first state may be a closed state of the mobile terminal 100.
  • first and second bodies 101 and 102 when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated in opposite directions to each other in the first and second directions R1 and R2, as shown in FIG. 4 ,
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be rotated away from each other, and accordingly, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may also be separated from each other (on the other hand, the first and third surfaces ( 101a, 102a) can be relatively close).
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be unfolded and disposed in the same flush with each other. That is, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may form one flat single body.
  • the display 151 is also unfolded, forming an enlarged screen on the unfolded first and second bodies 101 and 102, and precisely on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a unfolded on the same plane I can.
  • the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are also unfolded to form the same plane, and the auxiliary display 151a may be exposed to the outside of the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the user can perform an operation suitable for this by using the enlarged display 151.
  • one user may use the enlarged display 151, and at the same time, the other user may use the auxiliary display 151a located on the rear surface.
  • the unfolded state of the mobile terminal 100 may be referred to as a second state compared to the aforementioned first state.
  • the second state since the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate apart from each other, the second state may be described as an open state of the mobile terminal 100.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may return to the first state described above.
  • this first state reference is made to the preceding descriptions of FIGS. 2 and 3, and further descriptions are omitted.
  • FIG. 6 when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 further rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2 in the unfolded state, FIG. 6 As shown in, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may face each other while rotating toward each other so as to be close to each other, or may be in contact with each other (ie, may be folded), and accordingly, the first and third surfaces 101a ,102a) can also get closer and face each other. Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 may have a reduced size and appearance again, and the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may be exposed to the outside of the mobile terminal 100 to form the front and rear surfaces thereof.
  • the display 151 on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a is folded and hidden inside the mobile terminal 100, and only the auxiliary display 151a can be exposed from the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the display 151 can be protected from external impact in the mobile terminal 100, and instead, the user can appropriately perform the required operation using the auxiliary display 151a.
  • the folded state of the mobile terminal 100 opposite to the first state may be referred to as a third state compared to the first and second states. This third state can also be described as a reversely open state of the mobile terminal 100 compared to the first state.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may be sequentially switched to the second state of FIGS. 4 and 5 and the first state of FIGS. 2 and 3, and additional descriptions of these first and second states Without, the description provided above applies equally.
  • the mobile terminal 100 starts from the first state of FIG. 2 to the second state of FIG. It can be sequentially switched to the third state of 6.
  • the first and second directions R1 and R2 are the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are close to each other or face each other. May correspond to the directions of rotation, and the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 include the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are close to each other or face each other. It may correspond to the directions of rotation.
  • the mobile terminal 100 of the present application may include a hinge 200 , This hinge 200 will be described below with reference to the related drawings.
  • FIG. 7 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state
  • FIG. 8 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state
  • FIG. 9 is a view showing the hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state
  • 10 is a rear view showing a hinge of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state
  • 11 is a perspective view and a front view showing a block of the hinge
  • FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views and perspective views showing first and second links of the hinge.
  • 14 is a front view and a perspective view showing a holder of the hinge
  • FIG. 15 is a perspective view and a front view showing a stopper of the hinge.
  • FIGS. 7 to 9 show a second state, a first state, and a third state of the mobile terminal 100 described above, respectively.
  • FIGS. 7 to 9 accurately show the lower surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 in the second, first and third states, respectively.
  • FIG. 10 shows the hinge 200 viewed from the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the unfolded mobile terminal 100 (ie, the rear direction in the orientation of FIG.
  • the hinge 200 is basically disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so as to be rotatably connected or coupled to each other. More specifically, the hinge 200 is disposed between the adjacent side or side edges 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and may be configured to rotatably connect or couple. .
  • This hinge 200 as described above, the first and second bodies (101, 102) toward each other, that is, the third and fourth directions so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are closer to and face each other. It may be configured to rotate at (R3, R4), and accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 and the display 151 may be folded according to the first state.
  • the hinge 200 is the first and second so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are disposed in the same plane, or the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are disposed in the same plane.
  • the bodies 101 and 102 can be rotated away from each other, and accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 and the display 151 can be unfolded according to the second state.
  • the hinge 200 rotates the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are close to and face each other.
  • the mobile terminal 100 and the display 151 may be folded according to the third state.
  • the hinge 200 may be connected to arbitrary positions of the side portions 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the hinge 200 is coupled with the side portions 101c and 102c to connect the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a of the bodies 101 and 102, as well illustrated in FIGS. 7-9 Can be. Since the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are located on the outermost side of the bodies 101 and 102 and support the display 151, the hinge 200 connecting these surfaces 101a and 102a is adjacent to the display ( 151).
  • the hinge 200 may support a portion of the display 151 extending between the bodies 101 and 102 spaced apart from each other.
  • the entire display 151 is stably supported by supporting the portion between the bodies 101 and 102 using the hinge 200. Can be supported. Also, for more stable support, the hinge 200 may contact the display 151.
  • the hinge 200 may include a block assembly 201 extending between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and connected to the bodies 101 and 102.
  • the hinge 200 that is, the block assembly 201 may include a plurality of blocks 210 connected to each other.
  • each of the blocks 210 may extend long in the longitudinal direction of the bodies 101 and 102 between the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the blocks 210 may be oriented substantially parallel to the side portions 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 or the rotation axis thereof. Further, the blocks 210 may be sequentially arranged in parallel with each other toward the opposite side 102d from one side 102c.
  • each block 210 includes a body 211 extending elongated and shafts 212 provided at both ends of the body 211 in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. 11.
  • the body 211 may be configured to support and contact the surface of the adjacent display 151.
  • these shafts 212 are arranged on the longitudinal central axis of the block 210, that is, its body 211, and may extend along the central axis, as well shown in FIG. 11(b).
  • the central axis of the block 210 may be arranged in parallel with the side portions 101c and 102c of the bodies 101 and 102 or a rotational axis disposed between the bodies 101 and 102. Therefore, when the bodies 101 and 102 rotate, the block 210 may rotate around its central axis, that is, the axis 212, and thus, the rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 may be possible. .
  • the hinge 200 may include a link assembly 202 configured to connect the blocks 210 to each other.
  • the link assembly 202 may be provided at the ends of the blocks 210, precisely at the longitudinal ends thereof, so as not to interfere with the body 211 supporting the display 151. More specifically, the link assembly 202 is configured to hold the shafts 212 of the blocks 210, and the blocks 210, that is, the shafts 212, are rotatable with the link assembly 202. Can be combined. Accordingly, the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 thereof, may be connected to each other as one body by the link assembly 202, thereby connecting the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to each other.
  • the blocks 210 may be relatively rotated while being connected to each other by the link assembly 202, and accordingly, the hinge 200 may be formed by the movement of each of the blocks 210. (101,102) can be rotated relatively.
  • the link assembly 202 may be disposed outside the display 151 so as not to interfere with the display 151 as shown in FIG. 10. As illustrated in FIG. 10, such a pair of first link assemblies 202 may be provided at both ends of the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210. Accordingly, the blocks ( 210) can be stably connected to each other.
  • one of the components of the pair of link assemblies 202 will be described in detail, and this description applies equally to the corresponding components of the other link assembly 202.
  • any one of these link assemblies 202 may consist of only one member connecting all of the blocks 210 at a time, and by this link assembly 202, the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 It can be deformed or moved to rotate the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the link assembly 202 may include a plurality of separated links 220 and 230 for smoother relative motion of the blocks 210.
  • the link assembly 202 may include a first link 220 configured to connect a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other, as shown in FIGS. 7-10.
  • the first link 220 may include an elongated body 221 having a predetermined size, as well illustrated in FIG. 12.
  • the first link 220 may include a pair of slots 222a and 222b formed in the body 221.
  • the pair of slots 222a and 222b are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and may be formed through the body 221.
  • these slots 222a and 222b may rotatably accommodate the axes 212 of a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other. Accordingly, a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other by the first link 210 are stably connected to each other, and at the same time, they may rotate relatively to the first link 210.
  • the link assembly 202 may include a plurality of first links 210, and thus, as well as shown in FIG. 10, a pair of a plurality of blocks 210 connected by the first link 210 (pair) can be formed.
  • the link assembly 202 includes a second link 230 configured to connect two adjacent pairs of a plurality of blocks 210 formed on the first links 220 as described above. can do.
  • the second link 230 is located outside the first link 220 in the length direction of the block 210 so as to connect pairs of blocks 210 formed by the first link 220.
  • the first link 220 may be disposed adjacent to the body 211 of the block 210 and may be disposed relatively inward in the longitudinal direction.
  • a plurality of second links 230 may be applied to connect pairs of a plurality of blocks 210.
  • the second link 230 has a structure similar to that of the first link 220, and may include an elongated body 231 having a predetermined size, as well illustrated in FIG. 13. Further, like the first link 220, the second link 230 may include a pair of slots 232a and 232b formed in the body 231. The pair of slots 232a and 232b are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and may be formed through the body 231. In addition, as well illustrated in FIG. 10, these slots 232a and 232b may rotatably accommodate axes 212 adjacent to each other in pairs of blocks 210 adjacent to each other. Two adjacent pairs of the pairs of blocks 210 connected to the first link 220 may be stably connected to each other by the second link 230.
  • the blocks 210 may form a single body for the hinge 200 by the first and second links 220 and 230.
  • the blocks 210 may rotate relatively by the first link 220, and at the same time, the pairs of blocks 210 may also rotate relative to each other by the second link 230.
  • the hinge 200 that is, its block assembly 201, can be greatly deformed to have a predetermined curvature and a radius of curvature R as shown in FIG. 8 by such relative rotations.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto may be rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b face each other, that is, to switch to the first state.
  • the hinge 200 that is, its block assembly 201, can be largely rotated around the central portion, and accordingly, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102b face each other.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto may be rotated so as to be converted to a third state.
  • the behavior of the hinge 200 or the block assembly 201 thereof for the transition to these first and third states will be described in more detail later in this specification.
  • the hinge 200 may include a stopper 250 disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and precisely the side portions 101c and 102c thereof.
  • the stopper 250 may be disposed at the center of the space between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, that is, the side portions 101c and 102c.
  • the stopper 250 may be configured to be movable between the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the stopper 250 may be configured to be movable between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in a direction perpendicular to the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 thereof. With such a movable configuration, the stopper 250 may be selectively configured to be interposed between the blocks 210 of the block assembly 201.
  • the stopper 250 moves, it is disposed at the center of the block assembly 201 and is inserted between a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other or separated from the space between the pair of blocks 210.
  • a pair of blocks 210 disposed at the center of the block assembly 201 are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance, and the stopper 250 is It can move in or move out of these gaps.
  • the movement of the stopper 250 may be performed manually by a user, or may be performed in conjunction with rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 by an interlock mechanism 300 to be described later.
  • the stopper 250 may include a body 251 extending elongated and shafts 252 provided at both ends of the body 251 in the longitudinal direction. .
  • the body 251 may be configured to contact and support the surface of the display 151 together with the adjacent blocks 210.
  • these shafts 252 are arranged on a longitudinal central axis of the stopper 250, that is, its body 251, and may extend along the central axis.
  • the central axis of the stopper 250 may be arranged in parallel with the side portions 101c and 102c of the bodies 101 and 102 or a rotational shaft disposed between the bodies 101 and 102.
  • the stopper 250 when inserted between the blocks 210, it can be aligned with the adjacent blocks 210, and thus can smoothly interwork with the blocks 210.
  • the block assembly 201 when inserted between the blocks 210, the block assembly 201 may be formed as one block 210.
  • the hinge 200 supports the stopper 250 described above and may include a holder 240 configured to guide the movement of the stopper 250.
  • the holder 240 may likewise be disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, precisely its sides 101c and 102c, to guide the stopper 250, and the first and second bodies ( 101, 102), that is, may be disposed in the center of the space between the sides (101c, 102c).
  • a pair of blocks 210 disposed at the center of the block assembly 201 are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and the holder 240 may be disposed within such a distance, that is, between the blocks 210. , It may be rotatably coupled with the pair of blocks 210.
  • the holder 240 may be disposed at longitudinal ends of the blocks 210 and the stopper 250. Further, the holder 240 may be arranged in line with the first links 220 in a lateral direction of the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the holder 240 may function as the link assembly 202 connecting the blocks 210 as the first link 220, and the stopper 250 is referred to as the blocks 210, that is, the block assembly 201. ) And functionally and structurally.
  • Such a pair of holders 240 are provided at both ends of the stopper 250 in the longitudinal direction as well as the block assembly 201, that is, adjacent blocks 210 at the center, as well illustrated in FIG. In this way, the blocks 210 and the stopper 250 can be stably supported.
  • the holder 240 may basically include a body 241 disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the holder 240 that is, its body 241, as well as shown in FIG. 7, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are horizontally disposed on the same plane (flush), their side portions 101c ,102c) can be elongated in parallel.
  • the holder 240 that is, its body 241, in the folded state of the mobile terminal 100 shown in Figs. 8 and 9, the body (101, 102) or its surfaces (101a, 101b, 102a, 102b) and the alternative Can be oriented side by side.
  • the holder 240 may include a pair of slots 242a and 242b formed in the body 410 and a central slot 243 disposed between the slots 242a and 242b.
  • the slots 242a, 242b, and 243 may be spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and may be formed through the body 410.
  • the pair of slots 242a and 242b are disposed on both sides of the body 241, respectively, and may rotatably accommodate the axes 212 of the blocks 210 adjacent to the holder 240.
  • the central slot 243 may extend in substantially the same direction as the body 241.
  • the central slot 243 may be horizontally extended in parallel to the side portions 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 disposed on the same plane (flush) with each other.
  • the central slot 243 may accommodate the shaft 252 of the stopper 250, and accordingly, the stopper 250 may move along the slot 243 that is elongated.
  • at least the end of the center slot 243 may be disposed between the slots 242a and 242b so that the stopper 250 may be disposed between the blocks 210 coupled to the slots 242a and 242b.
  • the stopper 250 may move in a direction perpendicular to the block assembly 201, that is, its blocks 210 between the first and second bodies 101 and 102. That is, the stopper 250 may move toward the block assembly 201 to be inserted between the blocks 210 or may move away from the block assembly 201 to be withdrawn from the blocks 210. .
  • the holder 240 and the stopper 250 in particular, the holder 240 is disposed in the space between the bodies 101 and 102 or the central portion of the block assembly 201 disposed in this space, It may act as a center associated with the deformation or rotation of the hinge 200. Accordingly, the holder 240 and the stopper 250 are two portions rotatably connected to the block assembly 201, that is, the first and second block assemblies connected to the first and second bodies 101 and 102, respectively. It can be divided into (210a, 210b).
  • the hinge 200 is connected to the first body 101 and is connected to the first block assembly 210a and the second body 102 rotatably coupled to the holder 240 and rotates to the holder 240 It may include a second block assembly 210b coupled to each other.
  • the hinge 200 may be deformed to have a large curvature or may pivot the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto by largely pivoting about the center thereof.
  • the hinge 200 may be rotatably coupled to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so that the rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 is performed more smoothly. Since the hinge 200 is arranged to be connected to the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, it is actually rotated on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a. It can be possibly combined.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 include first and second supporters 101f and 102f configured to support the display 151. I can.
  • the first supporter 101f may have a body extending substantially parallel to the first or second surfaces 101a, 101b, and similarly, the second supporter 102f may have a third or fourth surface 102a, 102b ) May have a body extending substantially parallel to it.
  • These first and second supporters 101f and 102f form the bottom surfaces of the recesses 101e and 102e (see Fig. 4) for accommodating the display 151, thereby supporting them while in contact with the display 151. can do.
  • the first and second supporters (101f, 102f) may include hinges (101g, 102g) that are adjacent to the sides (101c, 102c) or the paper (200) of the body (101, 102) and provided at the ends thereof. have.
  • the hinge 200 that is, both sides of the block assembly 201 thereof, may be rotatably coupled thereto.
  • the axes 211 of the outermost blocks 210 adjacent to the side portions 101c and 102c of the body 101 and 102 are the first and second It may be rotatably coupled to the hinges 101g and 102g of the supporters 101f and 102f, respectively.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may additionally rotate to be closer to each other from both ends of the deformed or rotated hinge 200, and thus the second and The mobile terminal 100 may be smoothly folded so that the fourth surfaces 101b and 102b meet or the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a meet.
  • the hinge 200 when the hinge 200 is deformed to have a curvature for rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the third and fourth directions (R3, R4), that is, the first When the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are brought close to or facing each other for transition to the 1 state, the block assembly, that is, the inward portion in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 is relatively Can be compressed. Therefore, in order to smoothly deform the hinge 200, the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 needs to be configured to allow such relative compression. In this regard, referring to FIG.
  • the block 210 is a first portion (or first surface) 211a relatively adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a and the first A second portion (or second surface) 211b may be spaced apart from the portion 211a and adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b.
  • the first portion 211a is relatively positioned outside in the direction of the radius of curvature (R), and the second portion 211b is relatively the radius of curvature (R). It can be located inside from the direction.
  • the first portion 211a may be formed larger than the second portion 211b, in other words, the length or width of the first portion 211a may be formed larger than the length or width of the second portion 211b. .
  • the side portions 211c of the block 210 may be inclined inwardly. More specifically, the sides 211c of the block 210 are from the first or third side 101a, 102a (i.e., from the first portion 211a) and the second or fourth side 101b, 102b (That is, while extending toward the second portion 211b), it may be inclined to gradually approach inward. Thus, the block 210 extends from the first or third surface 101a, 102a toward the second or fourth surface 101b, 102b (ie, in the direction of the second or fourth surface 101b, 102b). ) It can be configured to have a cross section that gradually shrinks.
  • the block 210 may have a cross-section of an inverted trapezoidal shape, and the long side of this cross-section is disposed adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a, and the short side thereof is the second or fourth side ( 101b, 102b) can be arranged adjacent to.
  • the side portion 211c of one block 210 may be inclined away from the side portion 211c of the adjacent block 210, and accordingly, the side portion of the adjacent blocks 210
  • a predetermined gap may be formed between the fields 211c adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 101b. That is, gaps may be formed between the second portions 211b of the blocks 210, and each gap is from the first or third surfaces 101a, 102a to the second or fourth surfaces 101b, 102b. It can gradually decrease as you go.
  • the stopper 250 when the stopper 250 is also disposed between the central blocks 210, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 201: 210a and 210b, as shown in FIG. 8, the block assembly 201 Like ), by deformation for a predetermined curvature of the hinge 200, an inward portion of the stopper 250 in the direction of the radius of curvature R may be relatively compressed. Therefore, for smooth deformation of the hinge 200, the stopper 250 may also be configured to allow such relative compression. Referring to FIG. 15, the stopper 250 has a first portion (or first surface) 251a and the first portion 251a relatively adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a.
  • the first portion 251a is relatively located outside in the direction of the radius of curvature (R), and the second portion 251b is relatively located in the direction of the radius of curvature (R). can do.
  • the first portion 251a may be formed larger than the second portion 251b, in other words, the length or width of the first portion 251a may be larger than the length or width of the second portion 251b. . Due to these first and second portions 251a and 251b, the side portions 251c of the stopper 250 may be inclined inwardly.
  • the side portions 251c of the stopper 250 are from the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a (ie, from the first portion 211a) and the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. (That is, while extending toward the second portion 211b), it may be inclined to gradually approach inward. Accordingly, the stopper 250 extends from the first or third surfaces 101a, 102a toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b, 102b (ie, in the direction of the second or fourth surfaces 101b, 102b). ) It can be configured to have a cross section that gradually shrinks.
  • the stopper 250 may also have an inverted trapezoidal cross-section similar to the block 210, and the long side of this cross-section is disposed adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a, 102a, and the short side thereof It may be disposed adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. Further, due to this shape, the side portion 251c of the stopper 250 may be inclined away from the side portion 211c of the adjacent block 210, and accordingly, the stopper 250 and the blocks 210 adjacent thereto ), a predetermined gap may be formed adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 101b.
  • gaps may be formed between the stopper 250 and the second portions 251b and 211b of the blocks 210 adjacent thereto, and each gap is a second from the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a. Alternatively, it may be gradually decreased toward the fourth surfaces 101b and 102b.
  • the stopper 250 may include chamfers 253 provided on both sides of the body 251. The chamfer 253 may be configured so that the stopper 250 does not interfere with adjacent blocks 210 during movement. To this end, the chamfer 253 is disposed adjacent to the first portion 251a thereof, and may be connected to the side portion 251c. In addition, the chamfer 253 may be formed to be inclined opposite to the side portion 251c.
  • the stopper 250 when the stopper 250 is inserted between or withdrawn from the blocks 210, the chamfer 253 interferes with the side portions 211c of the blocks 210 inclined in the same direction as the side portion 251c. Otherwise, the stopper 250 may be smoothly inserted and withdrawn.
  • the stopper 250 may be inserted or interposed between the blocks 210 by moving along the slot 243 of the holder 240, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. This insertion may also be described as insertion into the block assembly 201.
  • the interposed stopper 250 may support the display 151 together with the blocks 210.
  • the stopper 250 supports adjacent central blocks 210, that is, the side portions 211c thereof, and accordingly, the second state of the mobile terminal 100 can be maintained.
  • the chamfer 253 of the stopper 250 is inclined opposite to the side portions 211c of the blocks 210, it can be in wide contact with the side portions 211c, and accordingly (thus) the stopper 250 Blocks 210 adjacent to) may be stably supported.
  • the first and second bodies ( 101,102) may be applied. Such a force may be applied by an external shock or a user's malfunction during use of the mobile terminal 100.
  • the user may experience inconvenience. have.
  • the side portions 211c May not allow additional rotation of the blocks 210 and the bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto in the first and second directions R1 and R2 while directly in contact with each other. That is, the hinge 200, that is, its block assembly 201, cannot be deformed to allow rotation in the first and second directions R1 and R2.
  • the stopper 250 when the stopper 250 is inserted between the blocks 210, specifically the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b, the first and third surfaces ( Rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be prevented so that 101a and 102a) are close to each other or further face each other. Due to the prevention of rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the first and second directions R1 and R2, unintentional folding of the display 151 may be prevented.
  • the blocks 210 can be reduced. More specifically, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate in the third and fourth directions (R3, R4), the blocks 210 rotate relative to each other due to the above-described shape configuration. , The side portions 211c may be close to each other.
  • adjacent blocks 210 also rotate relatively toward the stopper 250, and the side portions 251c and 211c may be close to each other.
  • portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 that is, the second portions 211b are close to each other, and the side portions 211c of the blocks 210 are I can contact you.
  • portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 and the stopper 250, that is, the second portions 211b and 251b are close to each other, and their side portions 211c, 251c) may contact each other as a whole.
  • the hinge 200 that is, the block assembly ( 201) can be configured to contract as a whole. More specifically, the hinge 200, that is, the inner portion of the block assembly 201 in the radius of curvature direction (ie, the portion adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b) may be contracted. The length in the circumferential direction of the hinge 200, that is, the first block assembly 201 deformed by this contraction, may be reduced, and thus, this reduction may allow compression in the radial (R) direction. . Therefore, as shown in FIG.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b face each other, that is, the mobile terminal 100 is switched to the first state.
  • the hinge 200 can be stably deformed while forming a large curvature.
  • the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210 and is identically interlocked with the other block 210 as one block 210, and accordingly, the hinge 200 as described above. ) Can be transformed. Therefore, when the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are formed to be closer to or facing each other. It may be configured to allow the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are disposed on the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b.
  • the spacing between 210 can be increased again.
  • the blocks 210 rotate relatively away from each other due to the above-described geometric configuration.
  • the side portions 211c may be separated from each other.
  • adjacent blocks 210 are also relatively rotated away from the stopper 250, and the side portions 251c and 211c may be separated from each other.
  • portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 that is, the second portions 211b may be separated from each other to form a gap again.
  • portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 and the stopper 250 that is, the second portions 211b and 251b may also be separated from each other to form a gap again.
  • the first and second bodies 102 and 102 are on the same plane with the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b away (i.e., the first and third surfaces 101a and 101b are close to each other).
  • the hinge 200 When rotated in the first and second directions R1 and R2 to be disposed, the hinge 200, that is, the block assembly 201 may be configured to expand.
  • the hinge 200 that is, the inner portion of the block assembly 201 in the radius of curvature direction (ie, the portion adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b) may be extended.
  • the length in the circumferential direction of the deformed hinge 200, that is, the block assembly 201 can be increased, and thus this increase can allow tension in the radial direction.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are placed on the same plane with the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b (or the first and third surfaces 101a and 101b).
  • the hinge 200 may be horizontally unfolded to rotate to be disposed, that is, to convert the mobile terminal 100 to the second state.
  • the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210 and is identically interlocked with the other block 210 as one block 210, and accordingly, the hinge 200 as described above. ) Can be transformed. Therefore, when the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b, the second and fourth states are switched from the first state to the second state.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are moved away from the faces 101b and 102b (that is, the first and third faces 101a and 102a are relatively close), and the first and second bodies 101 and 102 ) Can be configured to allow rotation, and thus can be switched from the first state back to the second state.
  • the stopper 250 moves along the slot 243 of the holder 240 and between the blocks 210, that is, It may not be inserted or interposed between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. That is, the stopper 250 may be separated from the blocks 210 or the first and second block assemblies 201: 201a and 210b. This separation may also be described as separation from the block assembly 201. Due to this separation, the space between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b is emptied, and accordingly, these assemblies 210a and 210b have a holder 240, specifically their slots 242a and 242b. You can freely rotate around ).
  • the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b may further rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2, and these assemblies 210a and 210b
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected to each other may also rotate in the same directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other.
  • the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b may maintain an extended state with an increased spacing as shown in FIG. 7. Therefore, the hinge 200 rotates about the holder 240, that is, about a predetermined axis, so that the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. I can.
  • the stopper 250 is not interposed between the blocks 210 or the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. , It is configured to allow the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to move in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are close to or face each other, and thus Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be switched from the second state to the third state. In addition, in the third state as shown in FIG.
  • the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b are in opposite directions (that is, It is possible to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4, and at the same time, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected to these assemblies 210a and 210b also have the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a. ) Can be rotated in the same directions R3 and R4 away (that is, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are close).
  • the hinge 200 may be rotated and spread horizontally.
  • the stopper 250 can be reinserted as shown in FIG. 7 between the block assemblies 210a and 210b spread in the same plane state, and accordingly, the first and second bodies 101 and 102, that is, the mobile terminal 100 ) May stably maintain the third state, as described above.
  • the stopper 250 is between the blocks 210, that is, the first and second block assemblies 210a, 210b) when not interposed, the first and third sides 101a, 102a are moved away (i.e., the second and fourth sides 101b, 102b) for transition from the third state to the first state. It may be configured to allow the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4).
  • the stopper 250 when the stopper 250 is inserted into the blocks 210 or the block assembly 201, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are rotated to face the hinge 200. While not allowing, when separated from the blocks 210 or the block assembly 201, the first and third sides 101a and 102a may be allowed to face.
  • the stopper 250 selectively allows the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. Can be configured.
  • the first and second links 220 and 230 are configured to allow rotation and other movement of the blocks 210 for such contraction and compression.
  • the slots 222a and 222b may be inclined in opposite directions. More specifically, the slots 222a and 222b extend from the points of the body 221 adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b and It can be inclined gradually closer to each other. That is, the spacing at the portion adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a of the slots 222a and 222b is adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the slots 222a and 222b.
  • the slots 232a and 232b may be inclined in opposite directions. More specifically, the slots 232a and 232b extend from the points of the body 231 adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b, It can be inclined gradually closer to each other. That is, the spacing at a portion adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a of the slots 232a and 232b is adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the slots 232a and 232b. It may be formed larger than the spacing at the site.
  • the slots 242a and 242b may also be formed on the first or third surfaces 101a, While extending from the points of the body 410 adjacent to 102a) toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b, they may be inclined to gradually approach each other inward. That is, the spacing at a portion adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a of the slots 242a and 242b is adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the slots 242a and 242b. It may be formed larger than the spacing at the site.
  • the stopper 250 selectively moves to be interposed in the block assembly 201, and accordingly, the intended state of the mobile terminal 100 can be achieved by the allowed rotation of the bodies 101 and 102. I can. Therefore, by linking the rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 and the movement of the stopper 250, the stopper 250 enables the intended state of the moving terminal 101 (that is, the rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 for this). It can be moved to the correct position.
  • the hinge 200 includes rotations of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the first and second directions R1 and R2 or in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 and the stopper 250 ) May include an interlock mechanism 300 configured to interlock the movement.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 includes the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in any one of the first and second directions R1 and R2 and the third and fourth directions R3 and R4. When rotated to, such a position allowing rotation of the bodies 101, 102, precisely, facing the first and third sides 101a, 102a or of the second and fourth sides 101b, 102b It may be configured to move the stopper 250 to a position allowing facing.
  • FIG. 16 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state
  • FIG. 17 is a side view showing the hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in a folded state
  • FIG. 18 is a mobile terminal in a reverse-folded state
  • It is a side view showing the hinge and interlocking mechanism included in the.
  • 19 is a rear view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
  • FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing in detail the linkage mechanism and the hinge
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 are side views each showing a modified block and a stopper. Among these drawings, FIGS.
  • FIGS. 16 to 18 show a second state, a first state, and a third state of the mobile terminal 100 to which the interlocking mechanism 300 is applied, respectively.
  • FIGS. 16 to 18 accurately show the lower surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 in the second, first and third states, respectively.
  • FIG. 19 shows the hinge 200 and the linkage mechanism 300 viewed from the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the unfolded mobile terminal 100 (ie, the rear direction in the orientation of FIG. 4 ). do.
  • This interlocking mechanism 300 is basically coupled to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 for interlocking the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and the stopper 250, and at the same time to be coupled with the stopper 250. I can.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may be connected to any positions of the sides 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 is adjacent to or connects the second and fourth faces 101b, 102b. It may be combined with the sides 101c and 102c to connect.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may be spaced apart from the hinge 200, and these (200,300) May not interfere with each other.
  • Such interlocking mechanism 300 may be made of various mechanisms to effectively interlock the bodies 101 and 102 and the stopper 250, for example, as shown, structurally the body 101 and 102 It may be made of a gear train (gear train) configured to transmit the rotational force of the body (101, 102) to the stopper (250). This gear train can also be configured to linearly reciprocate the stopper 250 between the bodies 101 and 102 for insertion into the optional block assembly 201 required for the stopper 250.
  • gear train gear train
  • This gear train can also be configured to linearly reciprocate the stopper 250 between the bodies 101 and 102 for insertion into the optional block assembly 201 required for the stopper 250.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 as such a gear train is a pair of first gears 310a and 310b provided or connected to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 first, as well illustrated in FIGS. 16-18. It may include.
  • the first gears 310a and 310b are disposed to face each other between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and may be configured to interlock with the first and second bodies 101 and 102. Accordingly, the first gears 310a and 310b may be configured to rotate together when the bodies 101 and 102 rotate.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may include a pair of second gears 320a and 320b that engage with the first gears 310a and 310b, respectively.
  • the second gears 320a and 320b may also be disposed to face each other, similar to the first gears 310a and 310b.
  • These second gears (320a, 320b) may be disposed inward (inward) the first gears (310a, 310b) in the lateral direction of the mobile terminal (100) or the bodies (101, 102), and accordingly, such a second
  • the gears 320a and 320b may mesh with each other.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are connected to each other by mutual engagement of the second gears 320a and 320b, and rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 may be interlocked by the interlocking mechanism 300. Accordingly, the interlocking mechanism 300 can rotate the first and second bodies 101 and 102 simultaneously by the same angle.
  • the second gears 320a and 320b may also mesh with the stopper 250 to move the stopper 250. Since the second gears 320a and 320b face each other to face each other, the second gears 320a and 320b may be engaged with different portions of the stopper 250, for example, both sides thereof. The second gears 320a and 320b need to be engaged with the stopper 250 as well as the first gears 310a and 310b, as described above, and thus may be formed as a compound gear for this purpose. have.
  • the second gear 320a may include a drive gear 321a and a driven gear 322a coupled to one shaft.
  • the other second gear 320b may also include a drive gear 321b and a driven gear 322b coupled to one shaft. Therefore, in these second gears (320a, 320b), the drive gears (321a, 321b) can be meshed with the first gears (310a, 320b), respectively, the driven gears (322a, 322b) and the stopper 250 Can be interlocked. In addition, as mentioned above, the driving gears 321a and 321b may be meshed with each other in order to mutually mesh the second gears 320a and 320b.
  • any one of the second gear (320a) may include a pair of driven gears (322a), these are the drive gear It may be disposed at both ends of the longitudinal direction or the axial direction of (321a), respectively.
  • the other second gear 320b may also include a pair of driven gears 322b, and these may be disposed at both ends of the drive gear 321b in the longitudinal direction or the axial direction, respectively. Since the second gears 320a and 320b are directly meshed with each other by their driving gears 321a and 321b, they can rotate in opposite directions.
  • the driving and driven gears 321a and 322a are coupled to the same shaft, they can rotate in the same direction, and likewise, the other second gear 320b is also driven. And since the driven gears 321b and 322b are coupled to the same shaft, they can rotate in the same direction. Accordingly, the driving and driven gears 321a and 322a of any one second gear 320a can rotate in a direction opposite to the driving and driven gears 321b and 322b of the other second gear 320b. I can.
  • the axes of the first and second gears 310a, 310b, 320a, and 320b described above are connected by a plurality of links 350, and accordingly, the first and second gears 310a, 310b, 320a, 320b) is coupled to each other and can rotate stably.
  • the stopper 250 may include a rack gear 254 meshing with the second gears 320a and 320b.
  • the rack gear 254 is the body 251 of the stopper 250 so as to be engaged with the interlocking mechanism 300, in particular its second gears 320a, 320b, as well as shown in FIG. 20 as well as other drawings. It may be elongated toward the interlocking mechanism 300 from.
  • the rack gear 254 may be disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 of the mobile terminal 100.
  • the rack gear 254 may also be aligned with the slot 243 of the holder 240 for movement for selective insertion of the stopper 250 into the block assembly 201. That is, the rack gear 254 is disposed in parallel with the slot 243 in the rotation axis direction of the mobile terminal 100 or its bodies 101 and 102, and the slot 243 is disposed in a direction perpendicular to the block assembly 201. Can be extended with Since this rack gear 254 has substantially the same orientation as the stopper 250 and the holder 240, the stopper 250 and holder 240 described above with respect to the additional orientation and arrangement of the rack gear 254 The orientation and arrangement of are referenced, and further description is omitted.
  • the rack gear 254 may be disposed between the second gears 320a and 320b facing each other, and may be It can have a flat plate or strip body. To be precise, the rack gear 254 may be disposed between the driven gears 322a and 322b of the second gears 320a and 320b. In addition, the rack gear 254, that is, portions or surfaces facing the second gears 320a and 320b of the body thereof may have teeth formed, and accordingly, the rack gear 254 It can be configured to mesh with both the second gears 320a and 320b, precisely their driven gears 322a and 322b.
  • Such a rack gear 254 may convert the rotational motion of the second gears 320a and 320b into linear motion.
  • the rack gear 254 may reciprocate in different directions according to the rotation direction of the second gears 320a and 320b, that is, in a direction toward the block assembly 201 and/or in a direction away from the block assembly 201. I can.
  • the supporter 250 may be selectively inserted into the block assembly 201 by such movement of the rack gear 254. That is, the supporter 250 may be inserted into the block assembly 201 or separated or removed from the block assembly 201.
  • the stopper 250 may include a pair of rack gears 254.
  • the pair of rack gears 254 may be spaced apart at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction of the stopper 250 to match the positions of the driven gears 232a and 232b.
  • the first gears 310a and 310b may be interlocked or connected with the bodies 101 and 102 by various methods so as to rotate together with the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may include levers 330a and 330b configured to connect the first gears 310a and 310b and the bodies 101 and 102.
  • the lever 330a extends between the first body 101 and the first gear 310a, and may be coupled with them. That is, the lever 330a may include a first end connected to the first gear 310a and a second end connected to the first body 101.
  • the first gear 310a may be formed separately and coupled to the first end of the lever 330a, and may be integrally formed with the first end of the lever 330a, as shown.
  • the shaft of the first gear 310a may be provided at the first end of the lever 330a.
  • the other lever 330b extends between the second body 102 and the first gear 310b, and may be coupled thereto. That is, the lever 330b may include a first end connected to the first gear 310b and a second end connected to the second body 102.
  • the first gear 310b may be formed separately and coupled to the first end of the lever 330b, and may be integrally formed with the first end of the lever 330b, as shown.
  • the shaft of the first gear 310b may be provided at the first end of the lever 330b.
  • the levers 330a and 330b may rotate opposite to each other at both ends of the support point.
  • these support points may be rotational axes of the first gears 310a and 310b provided to them 330a and 330b. Therefore, the first end of the lever 330a, that is, the first gear 310a, can rotate relative to the second gear 320a, and opposite to the second end of the lever 330a, that is, the first body 101. have.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may use another mechanism for rotating the first gears 310a and 310b in directions opposite to the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the second gear (320a: 321a, 322a) rotates in the opposite direction to the first gear (310a) meshed therewith, the second gear (320a) can actually rotate in the same direction as the first body (101). have.
  • the other second gear (320b: 321b, 322b) rotates in the opposite direction to the first gear (310b) meshed therewith, so the second gear (320b) is actually in the same direction as the second body (102). Can rotate.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 also faces the intended first and third surfaces 101a and 102a and the second and fourth surfaces For the second state to face (101b, 102b), it needs to be deformed while forming a predetermined curvature.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 since the interlocking mechanism 300 is disposed inside the hinge 200 in the direction of the radius of curvature R, it may have a relatively shorter radius of curvature than the first hinge 200. have. Therefore, the interlocking mechanism 300 is deformed to a greater curvature than the hinge 200 and at the same time is relatively compressed.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may be configured to be slidably connected or coupled to the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the first ends of the levers 330a and 330b are the first gears 310a and 310b around the rotational axis of the first gears 310a and 310b provided thereto. ) Can be relatively rotatable.
  • the second end of any one lever 330a may be slidably coupled to the first body 101.
  • the second end of the lever 330a may be slidably coupled to the first bodies 101 in a lateral direction of the first body 101.
  • the second end of the other lever 330b may be slidably coupled to the second body 102.
  • the second end of the lever 330b may be slidably coupled to the second body 102 in the lateral direction of the second body 102.
  • an interlocking mechanism is provided on the first and second bodies 101, respectively, and therein, levers 330a and 330b, that is, a bracket 340a for slidably receiving the second ends thereof, respectively. ,340b).
  • the brackets 340a and 340b may be disposed adjacent to the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b like other parts of the interlocking mechanism 300.
  • the brackets 340a and 340b may include levers 330a and 330b, that is, slots 341a and 341b for receiving the second ends thereof and guiding them to be movable.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may be rotatably connected to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 while being slidably connected by the levers 330a and 330b and the brackets 340a and 340b.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are connected to the third and third surfaces so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b become close.
  • both sides of the interlocking mechanism 200 that is, the levers (330a, 330b) are guided by the brackets (340a, 340b), the first And moving toward the second bodies 101 and 102, and may be inserted into these bodies 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may have a reduced length between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 as a whole, and thus absorb the overall compression applied without distortion. .
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are When the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are rotated in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that they are away from each other, as shown in FIG.
  • both sides of the interlocking mechanism 200 that is, the levers 330a , 330b
  • the levers 330a , 330b is guided by the brackets 340a and 340b and moves away from the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and may be withdrawn from these bodies 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism (300) as a whole can return back to the extended length between the first and second bodies (101, 102), thereby allowing a relatively applied tension. I can.
  • the second state of FIG. 16 when the mobile terminal 100 is switched to the third state shown in FIG. 18 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other, the previously described FIG.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may be further subjected to tension relative to the hinge 200. Therefore, during the transition from the second state of FIG. 16 to the third state of FIG. 18, the flanges 330a and 330b are guided by the brackets 340a and 340b, and the first and second bodies 101 and 102 It moves further away from and can be additionally withdrawn from these bodies 101 and 102. Conversely, when the mobile terminal 100 is switched from the third state of FIG. 18 to the first state of FIG. 16, or during this transition, the levers 330a and 330b are guided by the brackets 340a and 340b, It moves toward the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and can be inserted into these bodies 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may have a variable length between the sides 101c and 102c.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 can achieve an intended deformation allowing rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 without distortion or breakage.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 has parts 310-350 disposed between the first and second bodies 101, 102, and these parts 310-350 are of the first and second bodies 101, 102. It can interfere with the hinge 200 while rotating together by the rotation.
  • the block 210 of the hinge 200 is formed in a part of the body 211 facing the interlocking mechanism 300, and a recess 213 extending inwardly of the body 211 It may include.
  • the stopper 250 is also formed on a part of the body 251 facing the interlocking mechanism 300 and may include a recess 255 extending in the inner direction of the body 251.
  • a rack gear 254 meshed with the interlocking mechanism 300 may also be disposed in the recess 255.
  • the recesses 213 and 255 may be connected to each other in the block assembly 201 to form one large recess formed along the interlocking mechanism 300. Accordingly, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be accommodated by the recesses 213 and 255 during operation, and thus may not interfere with the hinge 200.
  • the interlocking mechanism may operate the stopper 250 as intended, only with parts interlocking with any one of the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 is a first gear 310 connected to any one of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and the first gear 310 and the stopper 250 respectively meshing It may include 2 gears (320).
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 is a first or second body to receive the lever 330 and the lever 330 connecting the first gear 310 and the first or second body 101, 102 mentioned above. It may include a bracket 340 provided on 101 and 102.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 may be configured to place the stopper 250 within the gap between the formed block assembly 201 by interlocking the aforementioned parts thereof and the rack gear 254. . That is, the interlocking mechanism 300 may move the stopper 250 to be inserted into the block assembly 201 in the third state.
  • the operation of the stopper 250 and the hinge 200 connected thereto in the second state as described above is referred to as described in FIG. 7, and further description is omitted.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are It may start to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 so that the four sides 101b and 102b get closer. While starting or performing such a rotation (that is, while the mobile terminal 100 is being converted from the second state in FIG. 16 to the first state), the first gears 310a and 310b are the first and second gears.
  • the rack gear 254 can translate in the direction of the arrow A2 (that is, in the direction of the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a). have. Therefore, in the first state shown in FIG.
  • the stopper 254 is still inserted into the block assembly 201, and from the convex assembly 201 toward the display 151 (that is, the first and second It may protrude further toward the three surfaces 101a and 101b), and thus, the display 151 deformed with a large curvature may be supported together with other blocks 210.
  • the operation of the stopper 250 and the hinge 200 connected thereto in the second state as described above is referred to as described in FIG. 8, and further description is omitted.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate in the opposite first and second directions R1 and R2. You can start. As shown in FIG.
  • the first gears (310a, 310b) can be rotated in directions (T3, T4) opposite to the rotational directions (R1, R2) of the first and second bodies (101, 102), respectively, and again the second gears (320a, 320b) ) May rotate in the same directions (T1, T2) as the rotation directions (R1, R1) of the bodies (101, 102).
  • the rack gear 254 can be translated in the direction of the arrow A1 (ie, in the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b).
  • the mobile terminal 100 can be restored to the second state shown in FIG. 16.
  • the stopper 254 may be moved in the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b while maintaining the state of being inserted into the block assembly 201. Accordingly, the stopper 254 may form the same plane as the other blocks 210 and support the flattened display 151 together with the other blocks 210.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are It may start to rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the third surfaces 101a and 102a become close. While starting or performing such a rotation (that is, while the mobile terminal 100 is being converted from the second state in FIG. 16 to the third state), the first gears 310a and 310b are the first and second gears.
  • the stopper 254 may be separated or removed from the block assembly 201.
  • the operation of the stopper 250 and the hinge 200 connected thereto in the second state as described above is referred to as described in FIG.
  • the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may start to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 which are opposite directions.
  • the first gears (310a, 310b) can be rotated in directions (T1, T2) opposite to the rotational directions (R3, R4) of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, respectively, and again, the second gears 320a, 320b ) May rotate in the same directions (T3, T4) as the rotation directions (R3, R4) of the bodies (101, 102).
  • the rack gear 254 can be translated in the direction of the arrow A2 (ie, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a). Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be restored to the second state shown in FIG. 16.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 rotates so that the first and second bodies 101 and 102 of the mobile terminal 100 come close to or face the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b.
  • the stopper 250 may be moved toward the hinge 200, that is, its block assembly 201.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 is a hinge 200, that is, while the first and second bodies 101 and 102 of the mobile terminal 100 rotate so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are closer to or facing each other.
  • the stopper 250 may be moved away from its block assembly 201.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 stops when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the second and fourth sides 101b and 102b face each other (i.e., in the first state).
  • the block 250 may be disposed between the block assembly 201 or the blocks 210. Further, even when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are oriented horizontally to form the same plane (i.e., in the second state), the interlocking mechanism 300 still attaches the stopper 250 to the block assembly 201, or It may be disposed between the blocks 210.
  • the interlocking mechanism 300 blocks the stopper 250 when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other (ie, in a third state).
  • the assembly 201 or the blocks 210 may be separated from or withdrawn so that they are not interposed.
  • the interlocking assembly 300 makes the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotatable in the intended directions, thereby achieving the 1-3 states. I can.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Telephone Set Structure (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a mobile terminal having a flexible display. The present application may provide a mobile terminal comprising: a first body which includes a first surface and a second surface facing the first surface; a second body which is rotatably provided at the first body and includes a third surface and a fourth surface facing the third surface; a hinge which is configured to couple the first and second bodies, rotate the first and second bodies in first and second directions, respectively, to allow the first and third surfaces to come close to each other, and rotate the first and second bodies in third and fourth directions, respectively, to allow the second and fourth surfaces to come close to each other; and a display which is provided throughout the first and third surfaces and is configured to be exposed to the outside when the first and second bodies are rotated while the second and fourth surfaces face each other, and to be concealed when the first and second bodies are rotated while the first and third surfaces face each other.

Description

이동 단말기Mobile terminal
본 출원은 이동 단말기에 관한 것으로서, 이용가능한 디스플레이 또는 화면의 크기를 조절하도록 구성되는 폴더블(foldable) 이동 단말기에 관한 것이다.The present application relates to a mobile terminal, and to a foldable mobile terminal configured to adjust the size of an available display or screen.
단말기는 이동 가능여부에 따라 이동 단말기(mobile/portable terminal) 및 고정 단말기(stationary terminal)으로 나뉠 수 있다. 다시 이동 단말기는 사용자의 직접 휴대 가능 여부에 따라 휴대(형) 단말기(handheld terminal) 및 거치형 단말기(vehicle mounted terminal)로 나뉠 수 있다. Terminals can be divided into mobile/portable terminals and stationary terminals depending on whether they can be moved. Again, mobile terminals can be divided into handheld terminals and vehicle mounted terminals depending on whether the user can directly carry them.
이동 단말기의 기능은 다양화되고 있다. 예를 들면, 데이터와 음성통신, 카메라를 통한 사진촬영 및 비디오 촬영, 음성녹음, 스피커 시스템을 통한 음악파일 재생 그리고 디스플레이부에 이미지나 비디오를 출력하는 기능이 있다. 일부 단말기는 전자게임 플레이 기능이 추가되거나, 멀티미디어 플레이어 기능을 수행한다. 특히 최근의 이동 단말기는 방송과 비디오나 텔레비전 프로그램과 같은 시각적 컨텐츠를 제공하는 멀티캐스트 신호를 수신할 수 있다. 이러한 확장된 기능의 수행을 위해 이동 단말기는 기본적으로 다양한 통신 프로토콜을 이용하여 다른 기기들 또는 네트워크에 연결되며, 사용자에게 상시적인 컴퓨팅 환경(ubiquitous computing)을 제공할 수 있다. 즉, 이동 단말기는 네트워크로의 연결성(connectivity) 및 상시적 컴퓨팅을 가능하게 하는 스마트 디바이스로 진화되어 있다. The functions of mobile terminals are diversifying. For example, there are functions of data and voice communication, taking pictures and videos through a camera, recording voice, playing music files through a speaker system, and outputting images or videos to the display unit. Some terminals add an electronic game play function or perform a multimedia player function. In particular, recent mobile terminals can receive multicast signals providing visual content such as broadcasting and video or television programs. In order to perform such extended functions, the mobile terminal is basically connected to other devices or networks using various communication protocols, and provides a user with ubiquitous computing. That is, mobile terminals have evolved into smart devices that enable connectivity to a network and always-on computing.
한편, 최근에는 충분한 탄성을 가져 큰 변형이 가능한 플렉서블 디스플레이가 개발되었다. 이러한 플렉서블 디스플레이는 반복적으로 접히거나 펴질 수 있다. 이동 단말기는 접거나 펴질 수 있는 폴더블한 몸체를 갖도록 구성될 수 있으며, 상기 플렉서블 디스플레이가 그와 같은 몸체에 설치될 수 있다. 따라서, 몸체가 접혀지거나 펼쳐질 때, 플렉서블 디스플레이도 접히거나 펼쳐질 수 있으며, 이동 단말기는 크기가 조절될 수 있는 디스플레이 또는 화면을 가질 수 있다. 한편, 폴더블한 몸체를 구현하기 위해서는 예를 들어, 힌지와 같은 기계적 메커니즘이 요구된다. 그러나, 기계적 메커니즘은 이동 단말기 몸체의 원활한 접힘 및 펼침을 위해서는 복잡하고 큰 크기를 갖게 된다. 따라서, 폴더블한 구조를 위한 기계적 메커니즘은 이동 단말기의 크기를 증가시키며, 이동 단말기 설계에 많은 제한을 가할 수 있다. On the other hand, in recent years, a flexible display that has sufficient elasticity and is capable of large deformation has been developed. Such a flexible display can be repeatedly folded or unfolded. The mobile terminal may be configured to have a foldable body that can be folded or unfolded, and the flexible display may be installed on such a body. Accordingly, when the body is folded or unfolded, the flexible display can also be folded or unfolded, and the mobile terminal can have a display or screen that can be adjusted in size. On the other hand, in order to implement a foldable body, for example, a mechanical mechanism such as a hinge is required. However, the mechanical mechanism has a complex and large size for smooth folding and unfolding of the mobile terminal body. Therefore, the mechanical mechanism for the foldable structure increases the size of the mobile terminal and may place many restrictions on the design of the mobile terminal.
본 출원의 목적은 단순하고 컴팩트한 폴더블 메커니즘을 갖는 이동 단말기를 제공하는 것이다. An object of the present application is to provide a mobile terminal having a simple and compact foldable mechanism.
본 출원의 다른 목적은 원활한 접힘 및 펴짐을 수행하는 폴더블 메커니즘을 갖는 이동 단말기를 제공하는 것이다.Another object of the present application is to provide a mobile terminal having a foldable mechanism that performs smooth folding and unfolding.
상술된 목적을 달성하기 위해, 본 출원은 제 1 면(surface) 및 상기 제 1 면에 대향되는 제 2 면을 포함하는 제 1 몸체; 상기 제 1 몸체에 회동가능하게 제공되며, 제 3 면 및 상기 제 3 면에 대향되는 제 4 면을 포함하는 제 2 몸체; 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 결합시키며, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 각각 회동시키며 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 서로 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 제 3 및 제 4 방향들로 각각 회동시키도록 구성되는 힌지; 및 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들에 걸쳐 제공되며, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들이 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 마주하게 회동할 때 외부로 노출되며 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들이 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 마주하게 회동할 때 감춰지도록 구성되는 디스플레이를 포함하는 이동 단말기을 제공할 수 있다. In order to achieve the above-described object, the present application includes a first body including a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface; A second body provided rotatably on the first body and including a third surface and a fourth surface opposite to the third surface; The first and second bodies are coupled, and the first and second bodies are rotated in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces are close to each other, and the second and fourth surfaces are close to each other. A hinge configured to rotate the first and second bodies in third and fourth directions, respectively; And provided over the first and third surfaces, the first and second bodies are exposed to the outside when the second and fourth surfaces rotate to face each other, and the first and second bodies are exposed to the first and second bodies. It is possible to provide a mobile terminal including a display configured to be hidden when the third surfaces rotate to face each other.
상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 인접하는 측부들은 서로 소정 간격으로 이격될 수 있으며, 상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 측부들 사이에 배치될 수 있다. Adjacent side portions of the first and second bodies may be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval, and the hinge may be disposed between the side portions of the first and second bodies.
상기 힌지는: 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 길이방향을 연장되며 서로 나란하게 배열되는 다수개의 블록들(block)로 이루어지는 블록 어셈블리; 및 상기 블록들의 끝단들에 제공되며, 상기 블록들을 서로 연결하도록 구성되는 링크 어셈블리를 포함할 수 있다. 각각의 상기 블록들은 상기 디스플레이를 지지하도록 구성되는 몸체와 상기 몸체의 양 끝단들로부터 각각 연장되는 축들을 포함할 수 있다. The hinge includes: a block assembly including a plurality of blocks extending in the longitudinal direction of the first and second bodies and arranged in parallel with each other; And a link assembly provided at ends of the blocks and configured to connect the blocks to each other. Each of the blocks may include a body configured to support the display and axes extending from both ends of the body.
상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상대적으로 회동할 때, 상기 블록 어셈블리는 수축하도록 구성될 수 있으며, 이를 위해 상기 블록들은 이들 사이의 간격을 감소시키도록 구성될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상대적으로 회동할 때, 상기 블록 어셈블리는 확장되도록 구성될 수 있으며, 이를 위해 상기 블록들은 이들 사이의 간격을 증가시키도록 구성될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 각각의 상기 블록들은 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들을 향해 연장되면서 점차적으로 축소되는 단면을 가질 수 있다. When the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the second and fourth sides are close, the block assembly may be configured to retract, and for this purpose, the blocks are configured to reduce the spacing between them. I can. In addition, when the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the first and third surfaces become close, the block assembly may be configured to expand, and for this purpose, the blocks increase the spacing therebetween. Can be configured. In more detail, each of the blocks may have a cross section that gradually decreases while extending toward the second and fourth surfaces.
상기 링크 어셈블리는: 서로 인접하는 한 쌍의 블록들을 연결하는 제 1 링크; 및 상기 제 1 링크에 의해 각각 연결되면서 서로 인접하게 배치되는 두 쌍의 블록들을 서로 연결하는 제 2 링크를 포함할 수 있다 The link assembly includes: a first link connecting a pair of blocks adjacent to each other; And a second link connecting two pairs of blocks disposed adjacent to each other while being connected by the first link, respectively.
또한, 상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들 사이에서 이동 가능하게 구성되며, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체를 상기 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 이동시키는 것을 선택적으로 허용하도록 구성되는 스토퍼(stopper)를 더 포함할 수 있다. 상기 스토퍼는 선택적으로 상기 블록들사이에 개재되도록 구성될 수 있다. In addition, the hinge is configured to be movable between the first and second bodies, and moving the first and second bodies in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other. It may further include a stopper (stopper) configured to allow selectively. The stopper may be selectively configured to be interposed between the blocks.
상기 스토퍼는 상기 블록들 사이에 개재될 때, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 회동하는 것을 방지하도록 구성될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 스토퍼는 상기 블록들 사이에 개재되지 않을 때, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 회동하는 것을 허용할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 힌지는 상기 스토퍼의 이동을 안내하도록 구성되는 홀더를 더 포함할 수 있다. When the stopper is interposed between the blocks, it may be configured to prevent the first and second bodies from rotating in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other. In addition, when the stopper is not interposed between the blocks, it may allow the first and second bodies to rotate in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other. In addition, the hinge may further include a holder configured to guide the movement of the stopper.
한편, 상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들과 연결되며, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 회동과 상기 스토퍼의 이동을 연동시키도록 구성되는 연동 메커니즘(interlock mechanism)을 더 포함할 수 있다. Meanwhile, the hinge may further include an interlock mechanism connected to the first and second bodies and configured to interlock the rotation of the first and second bodies and the movement of the stopper.
상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 서로 마주하도록 회동될 때, 상기 스토퍼를 상기 블록들 사이에 개재시키도록 구성될 수 있다. 다른 한편, 상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 회동될 때, 상기 스토퍼를 상기 블록들로부터 인출(withdraw) 하도록 구성될 수 있다. The interlocking mechanism may be configured to interpose the stopper between the blocks when the first and second bodies are rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces face each other. On the other hand, the interlocking mechanism may be configured to withdraw the stopper from the blocks when the first and second bodies are rotated so that the first and third surfaces face each other.
상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 스토퍼를 직선 왕복운동시키도록 구성되는 기어트레인으로 이루어질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 상기 연동 메커니즘은: 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체에 연결되며, 상기 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체의 회동시 함께 회동하도록 구성되는 제 1 기어; 상기 제 1 기어와 상기 스토퍼에 각각 맞물리며, 상기 제 1 기어의 회전에 의해 회전하면서 상기 스토퍼를 이동시키는 제 2 기어를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 스토퍼는 직선왕복운동을 위해 상기 제 2 기어와 맞물리는 랙 기어를 포함할 수 있다. The interlocking mechanism may consist of a gear train configured to linearly reciprocate the stopper. More specifically, the interlocking mechanism includes: a first gear connected to the first or second body and configured to rotate together when the first or second body rotates; A second gear meshed with the first gear and the stopper, respectively, and rotating by the rotation of the first gear to move the stopper. In addition, the stopper may include a rack gear meshed with the second gear for linear reciprocating motion.
또한, 상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 기어에 연결되며 상기 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체에 슬라이드 가능하게 결합되는 레버를 더 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체에 제공되며 상기 레버를 슬라이드 가능하게 수용하는 브라켓을 더 포함할 수 있다. In addition, the interlocking mechanism may further include a lever connected to the first gear and slidably coupled to the first or second body. In addition, the interlocking mechanism may further include a bracket provided on the first or second body and slidably receiving the lever.
본 출원에 따른 이동 단말기에서, 힌지는 회동가능한 다수개의 블록들을 포함하며, 이에 따라 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 원하는 방향으로 회동시키도록 소정의 곡률을 갖도록 변형될 수 있다. 따라서, 이러한 제 1 힌지는 단순하고 컴팩트한 구조를 가지면서도 의도된 기능, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 몸체의 회동을 가능하게 할 수 있다. In the mobile terminal according to the present application, the hinge includes a plurality of rotatable blocks, and accordingly, may be deformed to have a predetermined curvature so as to rotate the first and second bodies in a desired direction. Accordingly, this first hinge can have an intended function, that is, the rotation of the first and second bodies while having a simple and compact structure.
또한, 힌지는 이동 단말기의 몸체들의 회동과 상기 몸체들사이에 배치된 스토퍼의 이동을 연동시키는 연동 메커니즘을 포함할 수 있다. 연동 메커니즘에 의해 스토퍼는 선택적으로 블록들 사이에 배치되며 이에 따라 의도된 이동 단말기의 상태를 위한 몸체들의 회동이 가능하게 될 수 있다. In addition, the hinge may include an interlocking mechanism for linking the rotation of the bodies of the mobile terminal and the movement of a stopper disposed between the bodies. The stopper is optionally arranged between the blocks by means of the interlocking mechanism, thereby enabling the rotation of the bodies for the intended state of the mobile terminal.
도 1은 본 출원에 따른 이동 단말기의 전체적인 구성을 보여주는 블록도이다.1 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of a mobile terminal according to the present application.
도 2는 본 출원에 따른 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 정면도, 측면도들, 및 하면도이다. 2 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state according to the present application.
도 3은 접힌 상태의 이동단말기를 나타내는 배면도이다. 3 is a rear view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state.
도 4는 본 출원에 따른 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 정면도, 측면도들, 및 하면도이다. 4 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in an unfolded state according to the present application.
도 5는 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 배면도이다. 5 is a rear view showing the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
도 6은 도 2 및 도 3의 이동 단말기와 반대되게 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 정면도, 측면도 및 하면도이다. 6 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state opposite to the mobile terminal of FIGS. 2 and 3.
도 7은 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지를 보여주는 측면도이다.7 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
도 8은 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지를 보여주는 측면도이다.8 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state.
도 9는 반대쪽으로 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지를 보여주는 측면도이다. 9 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state in the opposite direction.
도 10은 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기의 힌지를 보여주는 배면도이다. 10 is a rear view showing a hinge of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
도 11은 힌지의 블록을 보여주는 사시도 및 정면도이다. 11 is a perspective view and a front view showing a block of the hinge.
도 12는 힌지의 제 1 링크를 보여주는 정면도 및 사시도이다. 12 is a front view and a perspective view showing a first link of the hinge.
도 13은 힌지의 제 2 링크를 보여주는 정면도 및 사시도이다. 13 is a front view and a perspective view showing a second link of the hinge.
도 14는 힌지의 홀더를 보여주는 정면도 및 사시도이다. 14 is a front view and a perspective view showing a holder of the hinge.
도 15는 힌지의 스토퍼를 보여주는 사시도 및 정면도이다. 15 is a perspective view and a front view showing a stopper of the hinge.
도 16은 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 측면도이다.16 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
도 17은 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 측면도이다.17 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in a folded state.
도 18은 반대쪽으로 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 측면도이다. 18 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in a folded state in the opposite direction.
도 19는 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기의 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 배면도이다. 19 is a rear view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state.
도 20은 연동 메커니즘과 힌지를 상세하게 보여주는 사시도이다. 20 is a perspective view showing in detail the linkage mechanism and the hinge.
도 21 및 도 22는 변형된 블록 및 스토퍼를 각각 보여주는 측면도이다. 21 and 22 are side views each showing a modified block and a stopper.
이하, 첨부된 도면을 참조하여 본 명세서에 개시된 실시예를 상세히 설명하되, 도면 부호에 관계없이 동일하거나 유사한 구성요소는 동일한 참조 번호를 부여하고 이에 대한 중복되는 설명은 생략하기로 한다. 이하의 설명에서 사용되는 구성요소에 대한 접미사 "모듈" 및 "부"는 명세서 작성의 용이함만이 고려되어 부여되거나 혼용되는 것으로서, 그 자체로 서로 구별되는 의미 또는 역할을 갖는 것은 아니다. 또한, 본 명세서에 개시된 실시예를 설명함에 있어서 관련된 공지 기술에 대한 구체적인 설명이 본 명세서에 개시된 실시예의 요지를 흐릴 수 있다고 판단되는 경우 그 상세한 설명을 생략한다. 또한, 첨부된 도면은 본 명세서에 개시된 실시예를 쉽게 이해할 수 있도록 하기 위한 것일 뿐, 첨부된 도면에 의해 본 명세서에 개시된 기술적 사상이 제한되지 않으며, 본 출원의 사상 및 기술 범위에 포함되는 모든 변경, 균등물 내지 대체물을 포함하는 것으로 이해되어야 한다. Hereinafter, exemplary embodiments disclosed in the present specification will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, but identical or similar elements are denoted by the same reference numerals regardless of reference numerals, and redundant descriptions thereof will be omitted. The suffixes "module" and "unit" for components used in the following description are given or used interchangeably in consideration of only the ease of preparation of the specification, and do not have meanings or roles that are distinguished from each other by themselves. In addition, in describing the embodiments disclosed in the present specification, when it is determined that detailed descriptions of related known technologies may obscure the subject matter of the embodiments disclosed in the present specification, detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. In addition, the accompanying drawings are for easy understanding of the embodiments disclosed in the present specification, and the technical idea disclosed in the present specification is not limited by the accompanying drawings, and all changes included in the spirit and scope of the present application It should be understood to include equivalents or substitutes.
제1, 제2 등과 같이 서수를 포함하는 용어는 다양한 구성요소들을 설명하는데 사용될 수 있지만, 상기 구성요소들은 상기 용어들에 의해 한정되지는 않는다. 상기 용어들은 하나의 구성요소를 다른 구성요소로부터 구별하는 목적으로만 사용된다.Terms including ordinal numbers, such as first and second, may be used to describe various elements, but the elements are not limited by the terms. These terms are used only for the purpose of distinguishing one component from another component.
어떤 구성요소가 다른 구성요소에 "연결되어" 있다거나 "접속되어" 있다고 언급된 때에는, 그 다른 구성요소에 직접적으로 연결되어 있거나 또는 접속되어 있을 수도 있지만, 중간에 다른 구성요소가 존재할 수도 있다고 이해되어야 할 것이다. 반면에, 어떤 구성요소가 다른 구성요소에 "직접 연결되어" 있다거나 "직접 접속되어" 있다고 언급된 때에는, 중간에 다른 구성요소가 존재하지 않는 것으로 이해되어야 할 것이다.When a component is referred to as being "connected" or "connected" to another component, it is understood that it may be directly connected or connected to the other component, but other components may exist in the middle. Should be. On the other hand, when a component is referred to as being "directly connected" or "directly connected" to another component, it should be understood that there is no other component in the middle.
단수의 표현은 문맥상 명백하게 다르게 뜻하지 않는 한, 복수의 표현을 포함한다. Singular expressions include plural expressions unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
본 출원에서, "포함한다" 또는 "가지다" 등의 용어는 명세서상에 기재된 특징, 숫자, 단계, 동작, 구성요소, 부품 또는 이들을 조합한 것이 존재함을 지정하려는 것이지, 하나 또는 그 이상의 다른 특징들이나 숫자, 단계, 동작, 구성요소, 부품 또는 이들을 조합한 것들의 존재 또는 부가 가능성을 미리 배제하지 않는 것으로 이해되어야 한다.In the present application, terms such as "comprises" or "have" are intended to designate the presence of features, numbers, steps, actions, components, parts, or combinations thereof described in the specification, but one or more other features. It is to be understood that the presence or addition of elements or numbers, steps, actions, components, parts, or combinations thereof, does not preclude in advance.
본 명세서에서 설명되는 실시예들은 이동 단말기에 플렉서블 디스플레이를 적용하기 위한 구성들을 포함한다. 그러나, 설명된 실시예들의 원리 및 구성(configuration)은 플렉서블 디스플레이를 사용하는 모든 디스플레이 장치에 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 다음의 실시예들은 이동 단말기에 기초하여 도시되고 설명되나 이동 단말기이외에도 폴더블한 구조를 갖는 모든 컴퓨팅 디바이스, 예를 들어, 랩탑 컴퓨터, 태블릿 및 각종 스마트 장치들에 실질적인 변형없이 적용될 수 있다. Embodiments described in this specification include configurations for applying a flexible display to a mobile terminal. However, the principles and configurations of the described embodiments can be equally applied to all display devices using the flexible display. In more detail, the following embodiments are shown and described based on a mobile terminal, but can be applied to all computing devices having a foldable structure, for example, laptop computers, tablets, and various smart devices other than a mobile terminal without substantial modification. I can.
도 1은 본 출원에 따른 이동 단말기의 전체적인 구성을 보여주는 블록도이다.1 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of a mobile terminal according to the present application.
상기 이동 단말기(100)는 무선 통신부(110), 입력부(120), 센싱부(140), 출력부(150), 인터페이스부(160), 메모리(170), 제어부(180) 및 전원 공급부(190) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 도 1에 도시된 구성요소들은 이동 단말기를 구현하는데 있어서 필수적인 것은 아니어서, 본 명세서 상에서 설명되는 이동 단말기는 위에서 열거된 구성요소들 보다 많거나, 또는 적은 구성요소들을 가질 수 있다. The mobile terminal 100 includes a wireless communication unit 110, an input unit 120, a sensing unit 140, an output unit 150, an interface unit 160, a memory 170, a control unit 180, and a power supply unit 190. ), etc. Since the components shown in FIG. 1 are not essential for implementing a mobile terminal, the mobile terminal described in the present specification may have more or fewer components than the components listed above.
보다 구체적으로, 상기 구성요소들 중 무선 통신부(110)는, 이동 단말기(100)와 무선 통신 시스템 사이, 이동 단말기(100)와 다른 이동 단말기(100) 사이, 또는 이동 단말기(100)와 외부서버 사이의 무선 통신을 가능하게 하는 하나 이상의 모듈을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 무선 통신부(110)는, 이동 단말기(100)를 하나 이상의 네트워크에 연결하는 하나 이상의 모듈을 포함할 수 있다.More specifically, among the components, the wireless communication unit 110 may be configured between the mobile terminal 100 and the wireless communication system, between the mobile terminal 100 and another mobile terminal 100, or between the mobile terminal 100 and an external server. It may include one or more modules to enable wireless communication between. In addition, the wireless communication unit 110 may include one or more modules for connecting the mobile terminal 100 to one or more networks.
이러한 무선 통신부(110)는, 방송 수신 모듈(111), 이동통신 모듈(112), 무선 인터넷 모듈(113), 근거리 통신 모듈(114), 위치정보 모듈(115) 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다.The wireless communication unit 110 may include at least one of a broadcast reception module 111, a mobile communication module 112, a wireless Internet module 113, a short-range communication module 114, and a location information module 115. .
먼저, 무선 통신부(110)에 대하여 살펴보면, 무선 통신부(110)의 방송 수신 모듈(111)은 방송 채널을 통하여 외부의 방송 관리 서버로부터 방송 신호 및/또는 방송 관련된 정보를 수신한다. 상기 방송 채널은 위성 채널, 지상파 채널을 포함할 수 있다. 적어도 두 개의 방송 채널들에 대한 동시 방송 수신 또는 방송 채널 스위칭을 위해 둘 이상의 상기 방송 수신 모듈이 상기 이동단말기(100)에 제공될 수 있다.First, referring to the wireless communication unit 110, the broadcast reception module 111 of the wireless communication unit 110 receives a broadcast signal and/or broadcast-related information from an external broadcast management server through a broadcast channel. The broadcast channel may include a satellite channel and a terrestrial channel. Two or more broadcast receiving modules may be provided to the mobile terminal 100 for simultaneous broadcast reception or broadcast channel switching of at least two broadcast channels.
이동통신 모듈(112)은, 이동통신을 위한 기술표준들 또는 통신방식(예를 들어, GSM(Global System for Mobile communication), CDMA(Code Division Multi Access), CDMA2000(Code Division Multi Access 2000), EV-DO(Enhanced Voice-Data Optimized or Enhanced Voice-Data Only), WCDMA(Wideband CDMA), HSDPA(High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA(High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE(Long Term Evolution), LTE-A(Long Term Evolution-Advanced) 등)에 따라 구축된 이동 통신망 상에서 기지국, 외부의 단말, 서버 중 적어도 하나와 무선 신호를 송수신한다. The mobile communication module 112 includes technical standards or communication methods for mobile communication (eg, GSM (Global System for Mobile communication), CDMA (Code Division Multi Access), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multi Access 2000)), EV -DO (Enhanced Voice-Data Optimized or Enhanced Voice-Data Only), WCDMA (Wideband CDMA), HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advanced), etc.), transmits and receives radio signals with at least one of a base station, an external terminal, and a server on a mobile communication network.
상기 무선 신호는, 음성 호 신호, 화상 통화 호 신호 또는 문자/멀티미디어 메시지 송수신에 따른 다양한 형태의 데이터를 포함할 수 있다. The wireless signal may include a voice call signal, a video call signal, or various types of data according to transmission/reception of text/multimedia messages.
무선 인터넷 모듈(113)은 무선 인터넷 접속을 위한 모듈을 말하는 것으로, 이동 단말기(100)에 내장되거나 외장될 수 있다. 무선 인터넷 모듈(113)은 무선 인터넷 기술들에 따른 통신망에서 무선 신호를 송수신하도록 이루어진다.The wireless Internet module 113 refers to a module for wireless Internet access, and may be built-in or external to the mobile terminal 100. The wireless Internet module 113 is configured to transmit and receive wireless signals in a communication network according to wireless Internet technologies.
무선 인터넷 기술로는, 예를 들어 WLAN(Wireless LAN), Wi-Fi(Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi(Wireless Fidelity) Direct, DLNA(Digital Living Network Alliance), WiBro(Wireless Broadband), WiMAX(World Interoperability for Microwave Access), HSDPA(High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA(High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE(Long Term Evolution), LTE-A(Long Term Evolution-Advanced) 등이 있으며, 상기 무선 인터넷 모듈(113)은 상기에서 나열되지 않은 인터넷 기술까지 포함한 범위에서 적어도 하나의 무선 인터넷 기술에 따라 데이터를 송수신하게 된다.Examples of wireless Internet technologies include WLAN (Wireless LAN), Wi-Fi (Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) Direct, DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance), WiBro (Wireless Broadband), WiMAX (World Interoperability for Microwave Access), HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advanced), etc., and the wireless Internet module ( 113) transmits and receives data according to at least one wireless Internet technology in a range including Internet technologies not listed above.
WiBro, HSDPA, HSUPA, GSM, CDMA, WCDMA, LTE, LTE-A 등에 의한 무선인터넷 접속은 이동통신망을 통해 이루어진다는 관점에서 본다면, 상기 이동통신망을 통해 무선인터넷 접속을 수행하는 상기 무선 인터넷 모듈(113)은 상기 이동통신 모듈(112)의 일종으로 이해될 수도 있다.From the point of view that wireless Internet access by WiBro, HSDPA, HSUPA, GSM, CDMA, WCDMA, LTE, LTE-A, etc. is made through a mobile communication network, the wireless Internet module 113 performs wireless Internet access through the mobile communication network. ) May be understood as a kind of the mobile communication module 112.
근거리 통신 모듈(114)은 근거리 통신(Short range communication)을 위한 것으로서, 블루투스(Bluetooth™), RFID(Radio Frequency Identification), 적외선 통신(Infrared Data Association; IrDA), UWB(Ultra Wideband), ZigBee, NFC(Near Field Communication), Wi-Fi(Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi Direct, Wireless USB(Wireless Universal Serial Bus) 기술 중 적어도 하나를 이용하여, 근거리 통신을 지원할 수 있다. 이러한, 근거리 통신 모듈(114)은, 근거리 무선 통신망(Wireless Area Networks)을 통해 이동 단말기(100)와 무선 통신 시스템 사이, 이동 단말기(100)와 다른 이동 단말기(100) 사이, 또는 이동 단말기(100)와 다른 이동 단말기(100, 또는 외부서버)가 위치한 네트워크 사이의 무선 통신을 지원할 수 있다. 상기 근거리 무선 통신망은 근거리 무선 개인 통신망(Wireless Personal Area Networks)일 수 있다.The short range communication module 114 is for short range communication, and includes Bluetooth™, Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Infrared Data Association (IrDA), Ultra Wideband (UWB), ZigBee, and NFC. Near field communication may be supported by using at least one of (Near Field Communication), Wi-Fi (Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi Direct, and Wireless USB (Wireless Universal Serial Bus) technologies. The short-distance communication module 114 is, between the mobile terminal 100 and a wireless communication system, between the mobile terminal 100 and another mobile terminal 100, or between the mobile terminal 100 through a wireless area network (Wireless Area Networks). ) And a network in which another mobile terminal 100 or an external server is located may support wireless communication. The local area wireless communication network may be a wireless personal area network (Wireless Personal Area Networks).
위치정보 모듈(115)은 이동 단말기의 위치(또는 현재 위치)를 획득하기 위한 모듈로서, 그의 대표적인 예로는 GPS(Global Positioning System) 모듈 또는 WiFi(Wireless Fidelity) 모듈이 있다. 예를 들어, 이동 단말기는 GPS모듈을 활용하면, GPS 위성에서 보내는 신호를 이용하여 이동 단말기의 위치를 획득할 수 있다. 다른 예로서, 이동 단말기는 Wi-Fi모듈을 활용하면, Wi-Fi모듈과 무선신호를 송신 또는 수신하는 무선 AP(Wireless Access Point)의 정보에 기반하여, 이동 단말기의 위치를 획득할 수 있다. 필요에 따라서, 위치정보모듈(115)은 치환 또는 부가적으로 이동 단말기의 위치에 관한 데이터를 얻기 위해 무선 통신부(110)의 다른 모듈 중 어느 기능을 수행할 수 있다. 위치정보모듈(115)은 이동 단말기의 위치(또는 현재 위치)를 획득하기 위해 이용되는 모듈로, 이동 단말기의 위치를 직접적으로 계산하거나 획득하는 모듈로 한정되지는 않는다.The location information module 115 is a module for obtaining a location (or current location) of a mobile terminal, and representative examples thereof include a GPS (Global Positioning System) module or a WiFi (Wireless Fidelity) module. For example, if the mobile terminal utilizes the GPS module, it can acquire the location of the mobile terminal by using a signal transmitted from a GPS satellite. As another example, if the mobile terminal utilizes the Wi-Fi module, the mobile terminal may acquire the location of the mobile terminal based on information of the Wi-Fi module and a wireless access point (AP) that transmits or receives a wireless signal. If necessary, the location information module 115 may perform any function among other modules of the wireless communication unit 110 in order to obtain data on the location of the mobile terminal as a substitute or additionally. The location information module 115 is a module used to obtain the location (or current location) of the mobile terminal, and is not limited to a module that directly calculates or obtains the location of the mobile terminal.
입력부(120)는, 영상 신호 입력을 위한 카메라(121) 또는 영상 입력부, 오디오 신호 입력을 위한 마이크로폰(microphone, 122), 또는 오디오 입력부, 사용자로부터 정보를 입력받기 위한 사용자 입력부(123, 예를 들어, 터치키(touch key), 푸시키(mechanical key) 등)를 포함할 수 있다. 입력부(120)에서 수집한 음성 데이터나 이미지 데이터는 분석되어 사용자의 제어명령으로 처리될 수 있다.The input unit 120 includes a camera 121 or an image input unit for inputting an image signal, a microphone 122 for inputting an audio signal, or an audio input unit, and a user input unit 123 for receiving information from a user, for example, , A touch key, a mechanical key, etc.). The voice data or image data collected by the input unit 120 may be analyzed and processed as a user's control command.
카메라(121)는 화상 통화모드 또는 촬영 모드에서 이미지 센서에 의해 얻어지는 정지영상 또는 동영상 등의 화상 프레임을 처리한다. 처리된 화상 프레임은 디스플레이부(151)에 표시되거나 메모리(170)에 저장될 수 있다. 한편, 이동 단말기(100)에 구비되는 복수의 카메라(121)는 매트릭스 구조를 이루도록 배치될 수 있으며, 이와 같이 매트릭스 구조를 이루는 카메라(121)를 통하여, 이동 단말기(100)에는 다양한 각도 또는 초점을 갖는 복수의 영상정보가 입력될 수 있다. 또한, 복수의 카메라(121)는 입체영상을 구현하기 위한 좌 영상 및 우 영상을 획득하도록, 스트레오 구조로 배치될 수 있다.The camera 121 processes an image frame such as a still image or a video obtained by an image sensor in a video call mode or a photographing mode. The processed image frame may be displayed on the display unit 151 or stored in the memory 170. On the other hand, a plurality of cameras 121 provided in the mobile terminal 100 may be arranged to form a matrix structure, and through the camera 121 forming a matrix structure as described above, various angles or focal points are applied to the mobile terminal 100. A plurality of image information may be input. In addition, the plurality of cameras 121 may be arranged in a stereo structure to obtain a left image and a right image for implementing a stereoscopic image.
마이크로폰(122)은 외부의 음향 신호를 전기적인 음성 데이터로 처리한다. 처리된 음성 데이터는 이동 단말기(100)에서 수행 중인 기능(또는 실행 중인 응용 프로그램)에 따라 다양하게 활용될 수 있다. 한편, 마이크로폰(122)에는 외부의 음향 신호를 입력 받는 과정에서 발생되는 잡음(noise)을 제거하기 위한 다양한 잡음 제거 알고리즘이 구현될 수 있다.The microphone 122 processes an external sound signal into electrical voice data. The processed voice data may be variously utilized according to a function (or an application program being executed) being executed by the mobile terminal 100. Meanwhile, the microphone 122 may be implemented with various noise removal algorithms for removing noise generated in a process of receiving an external sound signal.
사용자 입력부(123)는 사용자로부터 정보를 입력받기 위한 것으로서, 사용자 입력부(123)를 통해 정보가 입력되면, 제어부(180)는 입력된 정보에 대응되도록 이동 단말기(100)의 동작을 제어할 수 있다. 이러한, 사용자 입력부(123)는 기계식 (mechanical) 입력수단(또는, 메커니컬 키, 예를 들어, 이동 단말기(100)의 전·후면 또는 측면에 위치하는 버튼, 돔 스위치 (dome switch), 조그 휠, 조그 스위치 등) 및 터치식 입력수단을 포함할 수 있다. 일 예로서, 터치식 입력수단은, 소프트웨어적인 처리를 통해 터치스크린에 표시되는 가상 키(virtual key), 소프트 키(soft key) 또는 비주얼 키(visual key)로 이루어지거나, 상기 터치스크린 이외의 부분에 배치되는 터치 키(touch key)로 이루어질 수 있다. 한편, 상기 가상키 또는 비주얼 키는, 다양한 형태를 가지면서 터치스크린 상에 표시되는 것이 가능하며, 예를 들어, 그래픽(graphic), 텍스트(text), 아이콘(icon), 비디오(video) 또는 이들의 조합으로 이루어질 수 있다. The user input unit 123 is for receiving information from the user, and when information is input through the user input unit 123, the controller 180 can control the operation of the mobile terminal 100 to correspond to the input information. . Such, the user input unit 123 is a mechanical (mechanical) input means (or a mechanical key, for example, a button located on the front, rear or side of the mobile terminal 100, a dome switch (dome switch), a jog wheel, Jog switch, etc.) and a touch-type input means. As an example, the touch-type input means comprises a virtual key, a soft key, or a visual key displayed on a touch screen through software processing, or a portion other than the touch screen It may be made of a touch key (touch key) disposed on. On the other hand, the virtual key or visual key can be displayed on the touch screen while having various forms, for example, graphic, text, icon, video, or these It can be made of a combination of.
센싱부(140)는 이동 단말기 내 정보, 이동 단말기를 둘러싼 주변 환경 정보 및 사용자 정보 중 적어도 하나를 센싱하기 위한 하나 이상의 센서를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 센싱부(140)는 근접센서(141, proximity sensor), 조도 센서(142, illumination sensor), 터치 센서(touch sensor), 가속도 센서(acceleration sensor), 자기 센서(magnetic sensor), 중력 센서(G-sensor), 자이로스코프 센서(gyroscope sensor), 모션 센서(motion sensor), RGB 센서, 적외선 센서(IR 센서: infrared sensor), 지문인식 센서(finger scan sensor), 초음파 센서(ultrasonic sensor), 광 센서(optical sensor, 예를 들어, 카메라(121 참조)), 마이크로폰(microphone, 122 참조), 배터리 게이지(battery gauge), 환경 센서(예를 들어, 기압계, 습도계, 온도계, 방사능 감지 센서, 열 감지 센서, 가스 감지 센서 등), 화학 센서(예를 들어, 전자 코, 헬스케어 센서, 생체 인식 센서 등) 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 한편, 본 명세서에 개시된 이동 단말기는, 이러한 센서들 중 적어도 둘 이상의 센서에서 센싱되는 정보들을 조합하여 활용할 수 있다.The sensing unit 140 may include one or more sensors for sensing at least one of information in the mobile terminal, information on surrounding environments surrounding the mobile terminal, and user information. For example, the sensing unit 140 includes a proximity sensor 141, an illumination sensor 142, a touch sensor, an acceleration sensor, a magnetic sensor, and gravity. G-sensor, gyroscope sensor, motion sensor, RGB sensor, infrared sensor (IR sensor), fingerprint sensor (finger scan sensor), ultrasonic sensor (ultrasonic sensor) , Optical sensor (for example, camera (see 121)), microphone (microphone, see 122), battery gauge, environmental sensor (for example, barometer, hygrometer, thermometer, radiation detection sensor, It may include at least one of a heat sensor, a gas sensor, etc.), and a chemical sensor (eg, an electronic nose, a healthcare sensor, a biometric sensor, etc.). Meanwhile, the mobile terminal disclosed in the present specification may combine and utilize information sensed by at least two or more of these sensors.
출력부(150)는 시각, 청각 또는 촉각 등과 관련된 출력을 발생시키기 위한 것으로, 디스플레이부(151), 음향 출력부(152), 햅팁 모듈(153), 광 출력부(154) 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 디스플레이부(151)는 터치 센서와 상호 레이어 구조를 이루거나 일체형으로 형성됨으로써, 터치 스크린을 구현할 수 있다. 이러한 터치 스크린은, 이동 단말기(100)와 사용자 사이의 입력 인터페이스를 제공하는 사용자 입력부(123)로써 기능함과 동시에, 이동 단말기(100)와 사용자 사이의 출력 인터페이스를 제공할 수 있다.The output unit 150 is for generating an output related to visual, auditory or tactile sense, and includes at least one of the display unit 151, the sound output unit 152, the hap tip module 153, and the light output unit 154 can do. The display unit 151 may implement a touch screen by forming a layer structure or integrally with the touch sensor. Such a touch screen can function as a user input unit 123 that provides an input interface between the mobile terminal 100 and a user, and can provide an output interface between the mobile terminal 100 and a user.
음향 출력부(152)는 호신호 수신, 통화모드 또는 녹음 모드, 음성인식 모드, 방송수신 모드 등에서 무선 통신부(110)로부터 수신되거나 메모리(170)에 저장된 오디오 데이터를 출력할 수 있다. 음향 출력부(152)는 이동 단말기(100)에서 수행되는 기능(예를 들어, 호신호 수신음, 메시지 수신음 등)과 관련된 음향 신호를 출력하기도 한다. 이러한 음향 출력부(152)에는 리시버(receiver), 스피커(speaker), 버저(buzzer) 등이 포함될 수 있다.The sound output unit 152 may output audio data received from the wireless communication unit 110 or stored in the memory 170 in a call signal reception, a call mode or a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast reception mode, and the like. The sound output unit 152 also outputs sound signals related to functions (eg, a call signal reception sound, a message reception sound, etc.) performed in the mobile terminal 100. The sound output unit 152 may include a receiver, a speaker, and a buzzer.
햅틱 모듈(haptic module)(153)은 사용자가 느낄 수 있는 다양한 촉각 효과를 발생시킨다. 햅틱 모듈(153)이 발생시키는 촉각 효과의 대표적인 예로는 진동이 될 수 있다. 햅틱 모듈(153)에서 발생하는 진동의 세기와 패턴 등은 사용자의 선택 또는 제어부의 설정에 의해 제어될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 햅틱 모듈(153)은 서로 다른 진동을 합성하여 출력하거나 순차적으로 출력할 수도 있다.The haptic module 153 generates various tactile effects that a user can feel. A typical example of the tactile effect generated by the haptic module 153 may be vibration. The intensity and pattern of vibrations generated by the haptic module 153 may be controlled by a user's selection or setting of a controller. For example, the haptic module 153 may synthesize and output different vibrations or sequentially output them.
광출력부(154)는 이동 단말기(100)의 광원의 빛을 이용하여 이벤트 발생을 알리기 위한 신호를 출력한다. 이동 단말기(100)에서 발생 되는 이벤트의 예로는 메시지 수신, 호 신호 수신, 부재중 전화, 알람, 일정 알림, 이메일 수신, 애플리케이션을 통한 정보 수신 등이 될 수 있다.The light output unit 154 outputs a signal for notifying the occurrence of an event using light from a light source of the mobile terminal 100. Examples of events occurring in the mobile terminal 100 may include message reception, call signal reception, missed call, alarm, schedule notification, email reception, and information reception through an application.
인터페이스부(160)는 이동 단말기(100)에 연결되는 다양한 종류의 외부 기기와의 통로 역할을 수행한다. 이러한 인터페이스부(160)는, 유/무선 헤드셋 포트(port), 외부 충전기 포트(port), 유/무선 데이터 포트(port), 메모리 카드(memory card) 포트, 식별 모듈이 구비된 장치를 연결하는 포트(port), 오디오 I/O(Input/Output) 포트(port), 비디오 I/O(Input/Output) 포트(port), 이어폰 포트(port) 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 이동 단말기(100)에서는, 상기 인터페이스부(160)에 외부 기기가 연결되는 것에 대응하여, 연결된 외부 기기와 관련된 적절할 제어를 수행할 수 있다.The interface unit 160 serves as a passage between various types of external devices connected to the mobile terminal 100. The interface unit 160 connects a wired/wireless headset port, an external charger port, a wired/wireless data port, a memory card port, and a device equipped with an identification module. It may include at least one of a port, an audio input/output (I/O) port, an input/output (video I/O) port, and an earphone port. The mobile terminal 100 may perform appropriate control related to the connected external device in response to the connection of the external device to the interface unit 160.
또한, 메모리(170)는 이동 단말기(100)의 다양한 기능을 지원하는 데이터를 저장한다. 메모리(170)는 이동 단말기(100)에서 구동되는 다수의 응용 프로그램(application program 또는 애플리케이션(application)), 이동 단말기(100)의 동작을 위한 데이터들, 명령어들을 저장할 수 있다. 이러한 응용 프로그램 중 적어도 일부는, 무선 통신을 통해 외부 서버로부터 다운로드 될 수 있다. 또한 이러한 응용 프로그램 중 적어도 일부는, 이동 단말기(100)의 기본적인 기능(예를 들어, 전화 착신, 발신 기능, 메시지 수신, 발신 기능)을 위하여 출고 당시부터 이동 단말기(100)상에 존재할 수 있다. 한편, 응용 프로그램은, 메모리(170)에 저장되고, 이동 단말기(100) 상에 설치되어, 제어부(180)에 의하여 상기 이동 단말기의 동작(또는 기능)을 수행하도록 구동될 수 있다.In addition, the memory 170 stores data supporting various functions of the mobile terminal 100. The memory 170 may store a plurality of application programs or applications driven by the mobile terminal 100, data for operation of the mobile terminal 100, and commands. At least some of these application programs may be downloaded from an external server through wireless communication. In addition, at least some of these application programs may exist on the mobile terminal 100 from the time of delivery for basic functions of the mobile terminal 100 (eg, incoming calls, outgoing functions, message reception, and outgoing functions). Meanwhile, the application program may be stored in the memory 170, installed on the mobile terminal 100, and driven by the controller 180 to perform an operation (or function) of the mobile terminal.
제어부(180)는 상기 응용 프로그램과 관련된 동작 외에도, 통상적으로 이동 단말기(100)의 전반적인 동작을 제어한다. 제어부(180)는 위에서 살펴본 구성요소들을 통해 입력 또는 출력되는 신호, 데이터, 정보 등을 처리하거나 메모리(170)에 저장된 응용 프로그램을 구동함으로써, 사용자에게 적절한 정보 또는 기능을 제공 또는 처리할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(180)는 프로세서 및 이를 지원하는 다른 전자부품들을 포함할 수 있다. 이들 프로세서 및 전자부품들은 회로기판에 장착되어 제어부(180)로서 기능할 수 있다. In addition to the operation related to the application program, the controller 180 generally controls the overall operation of the mobile terminal 100. The controller 180 may provide or process appropriate information or functions to a user by processing signals, data, information, etc. input or output through the above-described components or by driving an application program stored in the memory 170. For example, the controller 180 may include a processor and other electronic components supporting the processor. These processors and electronic components may be mounted on a circuit board to function as the controller 180.
또한, 제어부(180)는 메모리(170)에 저장된 응용 프로그램을 구동하기 위하여, 도 1와 함께 살펴본 구성요소들 중 적어도 일부를 제어할 수 있다. 나아가, 제어부(180)는 상기 응용 프로그램의 구동을 위하여, 이동 단말기(100)에 포함된 구성요소들 중 적어도 둘 이상을 서로 조합하여 동작시킬 수 있다.In addition, the controller 180 may control at least some of the components described with reference to FIG. 1 in order to drive the application program stored in the memory 170. Furthermore, in order to drive the application program, the controller 180 may operate by combining at least two or more of the components included in the mobile terminal 100 with each other.
전원공급부(190)는 제어부(180)의 제어 하에서, 외부의 전원, 내부의 전원을 인가 받아 이동 단말기(100)에 포함된 각 구성요소들에 전원을 공급한다. 이러한 전원공급부(190)는 배터리(191)를 포함하며, 상기 배터리는 내장형 배터리 또는 교체가능한 형태의 배터리가 될 수 있다.The power supply unit 190 receives external power and internal power under the control of the controller 180 and supplies power to each of the components included in the mobile terminal 100. The power supply unit 190 includes a battery 191, and the battery may be a built-in battery or a replaceable battery.
상기 각 구성요소들 중 적어도 일부는, 이하에서 설명되는 다양한 실시예들에 따른 이동 단말기의 동작, 제어, 또는 제어방법을 구현하기 위하여 서로 협력하여 동작할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 이동 단말기의 동작, 제어, 또는 제어방법은 상기 메모리(170)에 저장된 적어도 하나의 응용 프로그램의 구동에 의하여 이동 단말기 상에서 구현될 수 있다. At least some of the respective components may operate in cooperation with each other to implement an operation, control, or control method of a mobile terminal according to various embodiments described below. In addition, the operation, control, or control method of the mobile terminal may be implemented on the mobile terminal by driving at least one application program stored in the memory 170.
도 2는 본 출원에 따른 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 정면도, 측면도들, 및 하면도이며, 도 3은 접힌 상태의 이동단말기를 나타내는 배면도이다. 또한, 도 4는 본 출원에 따른 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 정면도, 측면도들, 및 하면도이며, 도 5는 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 배면도이다. 도 6은 도 2 및 도 3의 이동 단말기와 반대되게 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기를 나타내는 정면도, 측면도 및 하면도이다. 이들 도면들을 참조하여, 본 출원의 이동 단말기(100)의 개략적인 구조가 다음에서 설명된다. 이들 도면들에서, 도 2(a), 도 2(b),(c) 및 도 2(d)는 접힌 이동 단말기(100)의 정면, 양측면들, 하면을 각각 보여주며, 도 4(a), 도 4(b),(c) 및 도 4(d)는 펼쳐진 이동 단말기(100)의 정면, 양측면들, 하면을 각각 보여준다. 또한, 도 6(a), 도 6(b),(c) 및 도 6(d)는 반대 방향으로 접힌 이동 단말기(100)의 정면, 양측면들, 하면을 각각 보여준다. 2 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state according to the present application, and FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state. In addition, FIG. 4 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in an unfolded state according to the present application, and FIG. 5 is a rear view illustrating the mobile terminal in an unfolded state. 6 is a front view, a side view, and a bottom view showing the mobile terminal in a folded state opposite to the mobile terminal of FIGS. 2 and 3. Referring to these drawings, a schematic structure of the mobile terminal 100 of the present application will be described below. In these drawings, FIGS. 2(a), 2(b), (c) and 2(d) show the front, both sides, and the bottom of the folded mobile terminal 100, respectively, and FIG. 4(a) , FIGS. 4(b), (c) and 4(d) show the front, both sides, and the bottom of the unfolded mobile terminal 100, respectively. In addition, FIGS. 6(a), 6(b), (c) and 6(d) show the front, both sides, and the bottom of the mobile terminal 100 folded in the opposite direction, respectively.
이동 단말기(100)는 접히거나(fold) 펴지기(unfold) 위해서는 서로 상대적으로 운동하는 두 개의 부위들(portions)을 포함할 필요가 있다. 따라서, 이동 단말기(100)는 도시된 바와 같이, 폴더블한(foldable) 구조를 갖기 위해 기본적으로 서로 분리되고 독립적인 두 개의 몸체들, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 접히거나 펴지기 위해, 이들 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)은 서로 상대적으로 회동가능하게 구성될 수 있다. The mobile terminal 100 needs to include two portions that move relative to each other in order to be folded or unfolded. Therefore, as shown, the mobile terminal 100 may include two bodies that are basically separated from each other and independent, that is, first and second bodies 101 and 102 in order to have a foldable structure. have. In addition, in order to be folded or unfolded, these first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be configured to be rotatable relative to each other.
먼저, 제 1 몸체(101)는 여러가지 형상을 가질 수 있으며, 예를 들어 도시된 바와 같이, 직사각 형상을 가질 수 있다. 제 1 몸체(101)는 소정의 내부 공간을 포함하는 하우징을 포함할 수 있으며, 이러한 하우징내에 앞서 도 1에서 설명된 다양한 부품들이 설치 또는 수용될 수 있다. 한편, 제 2 몸체(102)는 제 1 몸체(101)에 회동가능하게 제공될 수 있다. 즉, 제 2 몸체(102)는 제 1 몸체(101)에 회동가능하게 연결 또는 결합될 수 있으며, 이에 따라(thus) 상기 제 1 몸체(101)에 상대적으로 회동하도록 구성될 수 있다. 마찬가지로, 제 1 몸체(101)도 제 2 몸체(102)에 회동가능하게 연결 또는 결합될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 2 몸체(102)에 대해 회동하도록 구성될 수 있다. 즉, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)는 서로에 대해 상대적으로 회동가능하게 구성될 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 몸체(102)도 제 1 몸체(101)와 마찬가지로 여러가지 형상을 가질 수 있으며, 이러한 형상들중 상기 제 1 몸체(101)에 대응되는, 즉 같은 형상을 가질 수 있다. 제 2 몸체(102)가 제 1 몸체(101)에 대응되는 형상을 가지면 도 2 및 도 3에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)가 접힌 상태에서 이동 단말기(100)는 단일 몸체를 갖는 것과 같은 외관을 형성할 수 있다. 일 예로서, 제 2 몸체(102)도 제 1 몸체(102)에 대응되는 직사각 형상을 가질 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 몸체(102)도 제 1 몸체(102)와 마찬가지로, 소정의 내부 공간을 포함하는 하우징을 포함할 수 있으며, 이러한 하우징내에 앞서 도 1에서 설명된 다양한 부품들이 설치 또는 수용될 수 있다. First, the first body 101 may have various shapes, for example, as shown, may have a rectangular shape. The first body 101 may include a housing including a predetermined inner space, and various parts described in FIG. 1 may be installed or accommodated in the housing. Meanwhile, the second body 102 may be provided to the first body 101 so as to be rotatable. That is, the second body 102 may be rotatably connected or coupled to the first body 101, and thus may be configured to rotate relative to the first body 101 (thus). Likewise, the first body 101 may be rotatably connected or coupled to the second body 102, and thus may be configured to rotate with respect to the second body 102. That is, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be configured to be relatively rotatable with respect to each other. In addition, the second body 102 may have various shapes like the first body 101, and among these shapes, the second body 102 may have the same shape, that is, corresponding to the first body 101. When the second body 102 has a shape corresponding to the first body 101, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the mobile terminal 100 has a single body when the mobile terminal 100 is folded. It can form the same appearance. As an example, the second body 102 may also have a rectangular shape corresponding to the first body 102. In addition, the second body 102, like the first body 102, may include a housing including a predetermined internal space, and various parts described in FIG. 1 may be installed or accommodated in this housing. .
보다 상세하게는, 제 1 몸체(101)는 이의 여러 표면들중 제 1 면 (surface)(101a)과 이에 대향되게 배치되는 제 2 면(101b)을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 몸체(102)는 마찬가지로 이의 여러 표면들중 제 3 면 (surface)(102a)과 이에 대향되게 배치되는 제 4 면(102b)을 포함할 수 있다. 이동 단말기(100)가 접히거나 펴질 때에, 즉 제 1 몸체(101)가 서로 대향되는 방향들(R1,R3)로 제 2 몸체(102)에 상대적으로 회동할 때, 제 1 몸체(101)의 제 1 면(101a)는 제 2 몸체(102)의 제 3 면(102a)에 가까워지거나 마주하도록 구성될 수 있으며, 반면 이의 제 2 면(101b)은 상기 제 1 면(101a)에 대향되는 배치로 인해 제 2 몸체(102)의 제 4 면(102b)와 마주하거나 근접하도록 구성될 수 있다. 유사하게, 이동 단말기(100)가 접히거나 펴질 때에, 즉 제 2 몸체(102)가 서로 대향되는 방향들(R2,R4)로 제 1 몸체(101)에 상대적으로 회동할 때, 제 2 몸체(102)의 제 3 면(102a)은 제 1 몸체(101)의 제 1 면(101a)에 가까워지거나 마주하도록 구성될 수 있으며, 반면 이의 제 4 면(102b)은 상기 제 3 면(102a)에 대향되는 배치로 인해 제 1 몸체(102)의 제 2 면(101b)와 마주하거나 근접하도록 구성될 수 있다. 이러한 표면들(101a,101b,102a,102b)의 상대적 배향(orientation)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(102)의 회동을 제어함으로 달성될 수 있으며, 이러한 몸체들(102)의 회동은 후술되는 힌지(200)에 의해 가능하게 된다. 즉, 힌지(200)에 의해 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 서로 가까워지고 마주하도록 회동하며, 다른 한편(alternatively) 몸체들(101,102)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 서로 가까워지거나 마주하도록 회동할 수 있다. 이러한 힌지(200)은 몸체들(101,102)에 대한 설명에 뒤이어 관련도면들을 참조하여 나중에 설명된다. In more detail, the first body 101 may include a first surface 101a among several surfaces thereof and a second surface 101b disposed opposite to the first surface 101a. In addition, the second body 102 may likewise include a third surface 102a of several surfaces thereof and a fourth surface 102b disposed opposite thereto. When the mobile terminal 100 is folded or unfolded, that is, when the first body 101 rotates relative to the second body 102 in opposite directions (R1, R3), the first body 101 The first side 101a may be configured to be close to or face the third side 102a of the second body 102, while the second side 101b thereof is arranged opposite to the first side 101a. Due to this, it may be configured to face or be close to the fourth surface 102b of the second body 102. Similarly, when the mobile terminal 100 is folded or unfolded, that is, when the second body 102 rotates relative to the first body 101 in directions R2 and R4 facing each other, the second body ( The third side 102a of 102) may be configured to be close to or facing the first side 101a of the first body 101, whereas the fourth side 102b thereof is on the third side 102a. Due to the opposite arrangement, it may be configured to face or close to the second surface 101b of the first body 102. The relative orientation of the surfaces 101a, 101b, 102a, and 102b can be achieved by controlling the rotation of the first and second bodies 102, and the rotation of these bodies 102 is hinged to be described later. It is made possible by 200. That is, by the hinge 200, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are close to each other and face each other, and on the other hand (alternatively) the bodies 101 and 102 are The first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may be rotated to be close to each other or to face each other. This hinge 200 will be described later with reference to the related drawings following the description of the bodies 101 and 102.
이러한 구성하에서, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)은 이동 단말기(100)가 어느 한 쪽으로 접히거나 펴질 때, 이동 단말기(100)의 외형을 구성할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 도 2 및 도 3에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 마주하게 접힌 상태에서는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)은 이동 단말기(100)의 전면 및 배면을 각각 형성할 수 있다. 또한, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 4 및 도 5에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)기 펼쳐진 상태, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 동일 평면(flush)내에 배향되는 경우에서는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)은 하나의 동일 평면을 구성할 수 있다. 반면, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)은 이동 단말기(100)가 다른 한 쪽으로 접힐 때, 도 6에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)내에 감춰질 수 있다. 다른 한편(alternatively), 도 6의 이와 같은 다른 한 쪽으로 접힌 이동 단말기(100)에서, 감춰진 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)에 상대적으로, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101a,102a)은 이동 단말기(100)의 외형을 구성할 수 있으며, 이동 단말기(100)의 전면 및 배면을 각각 형성할 수 있다. 또한, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 4 및 도 5에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)기 펼쳐진 상태, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 동일 평면(flush)내에 배향되는 경우에서는 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)와 마찬가지로 하나의 동일 평면을 구성할 수 있다. 반면, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 노출되도록 접혀진 도 2 및 도 4의 이동 단말기(100)에서, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)는 이동 단말기(100)내에 감춰질 수 있다. Under this configuration, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may constitute the external shape of the mobile terminal 100 when the mobile terminal 100 is folded or unfolded to either side. For example, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, when the mobile terminal 100 is folded to face the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are The front and rear surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 may be formed, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, when the mobile terminal 100 is in an unfolded state, that is, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are oriented in the same plane (flush), the The first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may constitute one and the same plane. On the other hand, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a may be hidden in the mobile terminal 100 as shown in FIG. 6 when the mobile terminal 100 is folded to the other side. On the other hand (alternatively), in the mobile terminal 100 folded to the other side like this of FIG. 6, relative to the hidden first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, the second and fourth surfaces 101a and 102a are The external appearance of the mobile terminal 100 can be configured, and the front and rear surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 can be formed, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, when the mobile terminal 100 is in an unfolded state, that is, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are oriented in the same plane (flush), the Like the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may constitute one and the same plane. On the other hand, in the mobile terminal 100 of FIGS. 2 and 4 folded to expose the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are hidden in the mobile terminal 100. I can.
도 2-도 5에 도시된 바와 같이, 이와 같은 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)상에 디스플레이(151)가 제공될 수 있다. 실제적으로, 단일의 디스플레이(151)가 이러한 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)에 걸쳐 길게 연속적으로 연장되며 이에 따라 상당히 큰 화면을 제공할 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 도 4에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 몸체(101)는 제 1 면(101a)상에 형성되는 제 1 자리부(101e)(seat)를 포함할 수 있으며, 제 2 몸체(102)는 제 3 면(102a)상에 형성되는 제 2 자리부(102e)를 포함할 수 있다. 제 1 및 제 2 자리부(101e,102e)는 리세스로 이루어지며, 서로 연결되어 하나의 큰 자리부를 형성할 수 있다. 따라서, 길게 연장된 디스플레이(151)는 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 자리부(101e,102e)내에 안정적으로 수용될 수 있다. 이러한 디스플레이(151)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)상에 제공되므로, 이동 단말기(100)이 펼쳐질 때, 도 4에 도시된 바와 같이, 함께 펼쳐지며 큰 화면을 사용자에게 제공할 수 있다. 또한, 디스플레이(151)는 제 2 및 제 4 면(101b,102b)이 마주하게 이동 단말기(100)가 접혀지면, 도 2에 도시된 바와 같이 함께 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)와 함께 접혀지나, 여전히 이동 단말기(100) 외부에 노출된다. 따라서, 디스플레이(151)는 제 1 면(101a)에 위치되는 일부 및 제 3 면(102a)에 위치되는 일부로 기능적 및 구조적으로 분할될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이동 단말기(100)는 축소된 두 개의 화면을 가질 수 있다. 다른 한편, 디스플레이(151)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 마주하도록 이동 단말기(100)가 접혀지면, 도 6에 도시된 바와 같이 마찬가지로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)와 함께 접혀지나, 도 2에 도시된 것과 반대로 이동 단말기(100)내에 숨겨질 수 있다. 그러나, 이러한 경우, 디스플레이(151)가 숨겨지므로, 사용자가 이동 단말기(100)를 펼칠 때까지 정보를 제공받을 수 없다. 이러한 이유로, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 마주하도록 이동 단말기(100)가 접혀질 때도, 사용자에게 소정의 정보를 제공하도록 이동 단말기(100)는 도 2, 도 5 및 도 6에 도시된 바와 같이, 보조 디스플레이(151a)를 포함할 수 있다. 보조 디스플레이(151a)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 마주하게 이동 단말기(100)가 접혀질 때에 노출되는 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)중 어느 하나에 제공될 수 있다. 일 예로서 보조 디스플레이(151a)는 도시된 바와 같이, 제 2 몸체(102)의 제 4 면(102b)에 배치될 수 있다. 2 to 5, a display 151 may be provided on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a. In practice, a single display 151 extends long and continuously over these first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, thereby providing a fairly large screen. More specifically, as shown in Figure 4, the first body 101 may include a first seat (101e) (seat) formed on the first surface (101a), the second body ( 102) may include a second seat portion 102e formed on the third surface 102a. The first and second seats 101e and 102e are formed of recesses, and are connected to each other to form one large seat. Accordingly, the elongated display 151 can be stably accommodated in the first and second seat portions 101e and 102e. Since the display 151 is provided on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a, when the mobile terminal 100 is unfolded, as shown in FIG. 4, it is unfolded together and a large screen can be provided to the user. . In addition, when the mobile terminal 100 is folded so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b face each other, the display 151 is folded together with the first and second bodies 101 and 102 as shown in FIG. After that, it is still exposed to the outside of the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the display 151 may be functionally and structurally divided into a part located on the first surface 101a and a part located on the third surface 102a, and accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be divided into two reduced screens. Can have On the other hand, when the mobile terminal 100 is folded so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other, the display 151 is similarly formed with the first and second bodies 101 and 102 as shown in FIG. 6. It is folded, but can be hidden in the mobile terminal 100, contrary to that shown in FIG. 2. However, in this case, since the display 151 is hidden, information cannot be provided until the user opens the mobile terminal 100. For this reason, even when the mobile terminal 100 is folded so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other, the mobile terminal 100 is shown in FIGS. 2, 5 and 6 to provide predetermined information to the user. As shown, it may include an auxiliary display 151a. The auxiliary display 151a may be provided on any one of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b exposed when the mobile terminal 100 is folded so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. . As an example, the auxiliary display 151a may be disposed on the fourth surface 102b of the second body 102 as shown.
또한, 제 1 몸체(101)는 도 4에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 양 측부들(101c,101d)를 가질 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 몸체(102)도 마찬가지로 양 측부들(102c,102d)을 가질 수 있다. 이들중 측부들(101c,102c)는 서로 항상 인접하게 배치될 수 있으며, 다른 측부들(101d,102d)는 이동 단말기(100)의 상태, 즉 접힌 상태 및 펼쳐진 상태에 따라 서로 인접하거나 멀어질 수 있다. 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 일 예로서 이러한 측부들중 서로 항상 인접한 측부(101c,102c)에서 서로 상대적으로 회동가능하도록 연결될 수 있다. 이러한 회동가능한 연결을 위해서는 기계적 연결메커니즘이 필요하며, 앞서 언급된 바와 같이 이동 단말기(100)은 이와 같은 기계적 연결 메커니즘으로써 힌지(200)을 포함할 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 이와 같은 힌지(200)을 수용하기 위해 서로 인접한 측부들(101c,102c)에서 서로 소정간격으로 이격될 수 있으며, 상기 힌지들(200)은 이러한 이격된 측부들(101c,102c)사이에 배치되며 몸체들(101,102)을 회동가능하게 연결할 수 있다. In addition, the first body 101 may have both side portions 101c and 101d, as well illustrated in FIG. 4. In addition, the second body 102 may likewise have both side portions 102c and 102d. Among them, the side portions 101c and 102c may be disposed adjacent to each other at all times, and the other side portions 101d and 102d may be adjacent to or separated from each other depending on the state of the mobile terminal 100, that is, a folded state and an unfolded state. have. The first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be connected so as to be relatively rotatable with each other at the side portions 101c and 102c that are always adjacent to each other among these side portions as an example. A mechanical connection mechanism is required for such a rotatable connection, and as mentioned above, the mobile terminal 100 may include a hinge 200 as such a mechanical connection mechanism. Accordingly, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance at the side portions 101c and 102c adjacent to each other to accommodate the hinge 200, and the hinges 200 are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. It is disposed between the side portions 101c and 102c and can connect the bodies 101 and 102 to be rotatable.
이와 같은 기본적으로 구성하에서, 도 2에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)는 접힌 상태, 즉 제 1 상태를 가질 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 상태에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 서로 마주하거나 맞닿을 수 있으며, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)도 서로 마주할 수 있다. 따라서, 이동 단말기(100)는 축소된 크기 및 외형을 가질 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 상태에서, 디스플레이(151)는 접혀지면서 서로 대향되는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)에 각각 배치될 수 있다. 도 2 및 도 3에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 이동 단말기(100)의 전면 및 배면을 형성할 수 있으므로, 제 1 상태에서 이동 단말기(151)는 실질적으로 전면 및 배면에 둘 다에 배치되는 분할된 디스플레이들(151)을 가질 수 있다. 따라서, 사용자는 이러한 두개의 분할된 디스플레이들(151)을 사용하여 여러가지 기능들을 편리하게 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 두 명의 사용자가 동시에 분할된 디스플레이들(151)을 이용하여 독자적으로 필요한 작업을 편리하게 수행할 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 상태에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 서로 마주하거나 맞닿아 있으므로, 상기 제 1 상태는 이동 단말기(100)의 닫힌(closed) 상태가 될 수 있다. Under such a basic configuration, as shown in FIG. 2, the mobile terminal 100 may have a folded state, that is, a first state. In this first state, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may face or contact each other, and the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may also face each other. Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 may have a reduced size and appearance. In addition, in the first state, the display 151 may be disposed on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a facing each other while being folded. 2 and 3, since the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a can form the front and rear surfaces of the mobile terminal 100, the mobile terminal 151 is substantially It may have divided displays 151 disposed on both the front and rear surfaces. Accordingly, a user can conveniently perform various functions using these two divided displays 151. For example, two users can conveniently perform necessary tasks independently using the displays 151 divided at the same time. In this first state, since the first and second bodies 101 and 102 face each other or are in contact with each other, the first state may be a closed state of the mobile terminal 100.
이러한 제 1 상태에서, 도 2에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)로 서로 반대방향으로 회동되면, 도 4에 도시된 바와 같이, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 서로 멀어지게 회동될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)도 서로 멀어질 수 있다 (다른 한편, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)는 상대적으로 가까워질 수 있다). 따라서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)은 펼쳐질 수 있으며, 서로 동일평면(flush)내에 배치될 수 있다. 즉, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 하나의 평평한 단일 몸체를 형성할 수 있다. 동시에, 디스플레이(151)도 펼쳐지며, 펼쳐진 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)상에, 정확하게는 동일 평면상에 펼쳐진 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)상에 하나의 확대된 화면을 형성할 수 있다. 같은 이유로, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)도 동일 평면을 형성하도록 펼쳐지며, 보조 디스플레이(151a)도 이동 단말기(100) 외부로 노출될 수 있다. 따라서, 사용자는 확대된 디스플레이(151)를 사용하여 이에 적합한 작업을 수행할 수 있다. 또한, 하나의 사용자는 확대된 디스플레이(151)를 사용할 수 있으며, 동시에 다른 하나의 사용자는 배면에 위치된 보조 디스플레이(151a)를 사용할 수 있다. 이와 같이 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태는 앞서 언급된 제 1 상태와 비교하여 제 2 상태라고 불릴 수 있다. 이러한 제 2 상태에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 서로 이격되게 회동하므로, 상기 제 2 상태는 이동 단말기(100)의 열린(open) 상태로 설명될 수 있다. 한편, 만일 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)에 반대되는 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 각각 서로 반대되게 회동하면, 이동 단말기(100)는 이동 단말기(100)는 앞서 설명된 제 1 상태로 복귀될 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 상태와 관련해서는, 앞선 도 2 및 도 3에 대한 설명이 참조되며 추가적인 설명은 생략된다. In this first state, as shown in FIG. 2, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated in opposite directions to each other in the first and second directions R1 and R2, as shown in FIG. 4 , The first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be rotated away from each other, and accordingly, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may also be separated from each other (on the other hand, the first and third surfaces ( 101a, 102a) can be relatively close). Thus, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be unfolded and disposed in the same flush with each other. That is, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may form one flat single body. At the same time, the display 151 is also unfolded, forming an enlarged screen on the unfolded first and second bodies 101 and 102, and precisely on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a unfolded on the same plane I can. For the same reason, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are also unfolded to form the same plane, and the auxiliary display 151a may be exposed to the outside of the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the user can perform an operation suitable for this by using the enlarged display 151. In addition, one user may use the enlarged display 151, and at the same time, the other user may use the auxiliary display 151a located on the rear surface. In this way, the unfolded state of the mobile terminal 100 may be referred to as a second state compared to the aforementioned first state. In this second state, since the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate apart from each other, the second state may be described as an open state of the mobile terminal 100. On the other hand, if the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate opposite each other in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 opposite to the first and second directions R1 and R2, the mobile terminal 100 ), the mobile terminal 100 may return to the first state described above. With respect to this first state, reference is made to the preceding descriptions of FIGS. 2 and 3, and further descriptions are omitted.
다른 한편, 도 4에 도시된 바와 같이, 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)방향으로 더 회동하면, 도 6에 도시된 바와 같이, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 서로 가까워지게 서로를 향해 회동하면서 마주하거나 서로 맞닿을 수 있으며(즉, 접힐 수 있으며), 이에 따라 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)도 서로 가까워지고 마주할 수 있다. 따라서, 이동 단말기(100)는 다시 축소된 크기 및 외형을 가질 수 있으며, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 이동 단말기(100) 외부로 노출되면서 이의 전면 및 배면을 형성할 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)상의 디스플레이(151)는 접혀지면서 이동 단말기(100)내부로 감쳐지며, 보조 디스플레이(151a)만이 이동 단말기(100)로부터 노출될 수 있다. 따라서, 디스플레이(151)는 이동 단말기(100)내에서 외부의 충격으로부터 보호될 수 있으며, 대신에 사용자는 보조 디스플레이(151a)를 이용하여 요구되는 작업을 적절하게 수행할 수 있다. 이와 같이 이동 단말기(100)가 상기 제 1 상태와 반대로 접혀진 상태는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 상태들과 비교하여 제 3 상태라고 불릴 수 있다. 이러한 제 3 상태도 제 1 상태에 비교하여, 이동 단말기(100)의 역전되게 열린(reversely open) 상태로 설명될 수 있다. 한편, 만일 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 도 6의 제 3 상태에서 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)에 반대되는 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 각각 서로 반대되게 계속적으로 회동하면, 이동 단말기(100)는 도 4 및 도 5의 제 2 상태 및 도 2 및 도 3의 제 1 상태로 순차적으로 전환될 수 있으며, 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 상태들에 대해서는 추가적인 설명없이 앞서 제공된 설명이 동일하게 적용된다. 마찬가지로, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)로 계속적으로 회동하면, 이동 단말기(100)는 도 2의 제 1 상태로부터 도 4의 제 2 상태 및 제 6의 제 3 상태로 순차적으로 전환될 수 있다. 이러한 이동 단말기(100)의 작동을 고려할 대, 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 가까워지거나 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)를 회동시키는 방향들에 해당될 수 있으며, 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)는 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지거나 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)를 회동시키는 방향들에 해당될 수 있다. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 further rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2 in the unfolded state, FIG. 6 As shown in, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may face each other while rotating toward each other so as to be close to each other, or may be in contact with each other (ie, may be folded), and accordingly, the first and third surfaces 101a ,102a) can also get closer and face each other. Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 may have a reduced size and appearance again, and the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b may be exposed to the outside of the mobile terminal 100 to form the front and rear surfaces thereof. In addition, the display 151 on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a is folded and hidden inside the mobile terminal 100, and only the auxiliary display 151a can be exposed from the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the display 151 can be protected from external impact in the mobile terminal 100, and instead, the user can appropriately perform the required operation using the auxiliary display 151a. In this way, the folded state of the mobile terminal 100 opposite to the first state may be referred to as a third state compared to the first and second states. This third state can also be described as a reversely open state of the mobile terminal 100 compared to the first state. On the other hand, if the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are opposite to each other in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 opposite to the first and second directions R1 and R2 in the third state of FIG. When continuously rotated, the mobile terminal 100 may be sequentially switched to the second state of FIGS. 4 and 5 and the first state of FIGS. 2 and 3, and additional descriptions of these first and second states Without, the description provided above applies equally. Likewise, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are continuously rotated in the first and second directions (R1, R2), the mobile terminal 100 starts from the first state of FIG. 2 to the second state of FIG. It can be sequentially switched to the third state of 6. Considering the operation of the mobile terminal 100, the first and second directions R1 and R2 are the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are close to each other or face each other. May correspond to the directions of rotation, and the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 include the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are close to each other or face each other. It may correspond to the directions of rotation.
앞서 설명된 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 작동을 위해서는 이들을 회동가능하게 연결하는 연결 메커니즘이 요구되며, 이러한 연결 메커니즘으로서 본 출원의 이동 단말기(100)는 힌지(200)를 포함할 수 있으며, 이와 같은 힌지(200)가 관련된 도면을 참조하여 다음에서 설명된다. In order to operate the first and second bodies 101 and 102 described above, a connection mechanism for rotatably connecting them is required. As such a connection mechanism, the mobile terminal 100 of the present application may include a hinge 200 , This hinge 200 will be described below with reference to the related drawings.
도 7은 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지를 보여주는 측면도이며, 도 8은 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지를 보여주는 측면도이며, 도 9는 반대쪽으로 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지를 보여주는 측면도이다. 도 10은 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기의 힌지를 보여주는 배면도이다. 도 11은 힌지의 블록을 보여주는 사시도 및 정면도이며, 도 12 및 도 13은 힌지의 제 1 및 제 2 링크들을 보여주는 정면도들 및 사시도들이다. 또한, 도 14는 힌지의 홀더를 보여주는 정면도 및 사시도이며, 도 15는 힌지의 스토퍼를 보여주는 사시도 및 정면도이다. 이들 도면들중, 도 7-도 9는 앞서 설명된 이동 단말기(100)의 제 2 상태, 제 1 상태 및 제 3 상태를 각각 보여준다. 또한, 도 7-도 9은 정확하게는 제 2, 제 1 및 제 3 상태들의 이동 단말기(100)의 하면들을 각각 보여준다. 또한, 도 10은 펼쳐진 이동 단말기(100)의 제 2 및 제 4 면(101b,102b)방향(즉, 도 4의 배향에 있어서 배면방향)에서 본 힌지(200)를 도시한다. FIG. 7 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state, FIG. 8 is a side view showing a hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state, and FIG. 9 is a view showing the hinge included in the mobile terminal in a folded state It is a side view. 10 is a rear view showing a hinge of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state. 11 is a perspective view and a front view showing a block of the hinge, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views and perspective views showing first and second links of the hinge. 14 is a front view and a perspective view showing a holder of the hinge, and FIG. 15 is a perspective view and a front view showing a stopper of the hinge. Among these drawings, FIGS. 7 to 9 show a second state, a first state, and a third state of the mobile terminal 100 described above, respectively. In addition, FIGS. 7 to 9 accurately show the lower surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 in the second, first and third states, respectively. Further, FIG. 10 shows the hinge 200 viewed from the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the unfolded mobile terminal 100 (ie, the rear direction in the orientation of FIG.
힌지(200)는 도시된 바와 같이, 기본적으로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)사이에 배치되어 이들을 서로에 대해 회동가능하게 연결 또는 결합할 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 힌지(200)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 서로 인접하는 측부 또는 사이드 엣지(101c,102c)사이에 배치되며, 이들을 회동가능하게 연결 또는 결합시키도록 구성될 수 있다. 이러한 힌지(200)는 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 서로 가까워지고 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 서로를 향해, 즉 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동시키도록 구성될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 1 상태에 따라 이동 단말기(100) 및 디스플레이(151)를 접히게 할 수 있다. 다른 한편, 힌지(200)는 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 서로 동일평면내에 배치되거나 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 서로 동일평면에내 배치되도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 서로 멀어지게 회동시킬 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 2 상태에 따라 이동 단말기(100) 및 디스플레이(151)를 펼쳐지게 할 수 있다. 또 다른 한편, 힌지(200)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 서로 가까워지고 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동시키도록 구성될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 3 상태에 따라 이동 단말기(100) 및 디스플레이(151)를 접히게 할 수 있다. As shown, the hinge 200 is basically disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so as to be rotatably connected or coupled to each other. More specifically, the hinge 200 is disposed between the adjacent side or side edges 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and may be configured to rotatably connect or couple. . This hinge 200, as described above, the first and second bodies (101, 102) toward each other, that is, the third and fourth directions so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are closer to and face each other. It may be configured to rotate at (R3, R4), and accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 and the display 151 may be folded according to the first state. On the other hand, the hinge 200 is the first and second so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are disposed in the same plane, or the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are disposed in the same plane. The bodies 101 and 102 can be rotated away from each other, and accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 and the display 151 can be unfolded according to the second state. On the other hand, the hinge 200 rotates the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are close to and face each other. The mobile terminal 100 and the display 151 may be folded according to the third state.
또한, 힌지(200)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 측부들(101c,102c)의 임의의 위치들에 연결될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 힌지(200)는 도 7-도 9에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 몸체들(101,102)의 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)을 연결하도록 측부들(101c,102c)와 결합될 수 있다. 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a.102a)은 몸체들(101,102)의 최외부에 위치되며 디스플레이(151)를 지지하므로, 이러한 면들(101a,102a)을 연결하는 힌지(200)는 인접하는 디스플레이(151)를 지지하도록 구성될 수 있다. 정확하게는, 힌지(200)는 서로 이격된 몸체들(101,102)사이에 연장되는 디스플레이(151)의 일부를 지지할 수 있다. 기본적으로 디스플레이(151)는 대부분 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)에 의해 지지되므로, 힌지(200)를 이용하여 이러한 몸체들(101,102)사이의 부위를 지지함으로써 디스플레이(151) 전체가 안정적으로 지지될 수 있다. 또한, 보다 안정적인 지지를 위해 힌지(200)는 디스플레이(151)와 접촉할 수 있다. Further, the hinge 200 may be connected to arbitrary positions of the side portions 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102. For example, the hinge 200 is coupled with the side portions 101c and 102c to connect the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a of the bodies 101 and 102, as well illustrated in FIGS. 7-9 Can be. Since the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are located on the outermost side of the bodies 101 and 102 and support the display 151, the hinge 200 connecting these surfaces 101a and 102a is adjacent to the display ( 151). To be precise, the hinge 200 may support a portion of the display 151 extending between the bodies 101 and 102 spaced apart from each other. Basically, since the display 151 is mostly supported by the first and second bodies 101 and 102, the entire display 151 is stably supported by supporting the portion between the bodies 101 and 102 using the hinge 200. Can be supported. Also, for more stable support, the hinge 200 may contact the display 151.
이러한 힌지(200)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에 연장되며 이들 몸체들(101,102)과 연결되는 블록 어셈블리(201)를 포함할 수 있다. 힌지(200), 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)는 서로 연결된 다수개의 블록들(block)(210)로 이루어질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 각각의 블록들(210)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에서 상기 몸체들(101,102)의 길이방향으로 길게 연장될 수 있다. 또한, 블록들(210)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101)의 측부들(101c,102c) 또는 이의 회동축에 대해 실질적으로 나란하게 배향될 수 있다. 더 나아가, 블록들(210)은 어느 한 측부(102c)로부터 대향되는 다른 측부(102d)를 향해(toward) 서로 나란하게 순차적으로 배열될 수 있다. The hinge 200 may include a block assembly 201 extending between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and connected to the bodies 101 and 102. The hinge 200, that is, the block assembly 201 may include a plurality of blocks 210 connected to each other. In more detail, each of the blocks 210 may extend long in the longitudinal direction of the bodies 101 and 102 between the first and second bodies 101 and 102. Further, the blocks 210 may be oriented substantially parallel to the side portions 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 or the rotation axis thereof. Further, the blocks 210 may be sequentially arranged in parallel with each other toward the opposite side 102d from one side 102c.
보다 상세하게는, 각각의 블록(210)은 도 11에 도시된 바와 같이, 길게 연장되는 몸체(211)와 상기 몸체(211)의 길이방향 양 끝단들에 각각 제공되는 축들(212)을 포함할 수 있다. 몸체(211)는 인접하는 디스플레이(151)의 표면과 접촉하면서 이를 지지하도록 구성될 수 있다. 또한, 이들 축(212)은 도 11(b)에 잘 나타나는 바와 같이, 블록(210), 즉 이의 몸체(211)의 길이방향 중심축상에 배열되며 상기 중심축을 따라 연장될 수 있다. 앞서 언급된 바와 같이, 이러한 블록(210)의 중심축은 몸체들(101,102)의 측부들(101c,102c) 또는 상기 몸체들(101,102)의 사이에 배치되는 회동축에 나란하게 배열될 수 있다. 따라서, 몸체들(101,102)이 회동할 때, 블록(210)은 이의 중심축, 즉 축(212)을 중심으로 회동할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이러한 몸체들(101,102)의 회동이 가능하게 할 수 있다. In more detail, each block 210 includes a body 211 extending elongated and shafts 212 provided at both ends of the body 211 in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. 11. I can. The body 211 may be configured to support and contact the surface of the adjacent display 151. In addition, these shafts 212 are arranged on the longitudinal central axis of the block 210, that is, its body 211, and may extend along the central axis, as well shown in FIG. 11(b). As mentioned above, the central axis of the block 210 may be arranged in parallel with the side portions 101c and 102c of the bodies 101 and 102 or a rotational axis disposed between the bodies 101 and 102. Therefore, when the bodies 101 and 102 rotate, the block 210 may rotate around its central axis, that is, the axis 212, and thus, the rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 may be possible. .
또한, 힌지(200)는 블록들(210)을 서로 연결시키도록 구성되는 링크 어셈블리(202)를 포함할 수 있다. 링크 어셈블리(202)는 디스플레이(151)를 지지하는 몸체(211)와 간섭하지 않도록 블록들(210)의 끝단들, 정확하게는 이의 길이방향 끝단들에 제공될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 링크 어셈블리(202)는 블록들(210)의 축들(212)을 붙잡도록 구성되며, 상기 블록들(210), 즉 축들(212)은 상기 링크 어셈블리(202)에 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 따라서, 이러한 링크 어셈블리(202)에 의해 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 이의 블록들(210)은 하나의 몸체로써 서로 연결될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 서로 연결할 수 있다. 또한, 링크 어셈블리(202)에 의해 블록들(210)은 서로 연결되면서도 상대적으로 회동할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이러한 각각의 블록들(210)의 운동에 의해 힌지(200)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 상대적으로 회동시킬 수 있다. 또한, 링크 어셈블리(202)는 도 10에 도시된 바와 같이, 디스플레이(151)와 간섭하지 않도록 상기 디스플레이(151) 바깥쪽에 배치될 수 있다. 이와 같은 한 쌍의 제 1 링크 어셈블리(202)가 도 10에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 블록들(210)의 양 끝단들에 각각 제공될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 블록들(210)을 서로 안정적으로 연결할 수 있다. 다음에서 이러한 한 쌍의 링크 어셈블리(202)중 어느 하나의 구성요소들이 상세하게 설명되며 이러한 설명은 다른 하나의 링크 어셈블리(202)의 해당 구성요소들에 동일하게 적용된다. In addition, the hinge 200 may include a link assembly 202 configured to connect the blocks 210 to each other. The link assembly 202 may be provided at the ends of the blocks 210, precisely at the longitudinal ends thereof, so as not to interfere with the body 211 supporting the display 151. More specifically, the link assembly 202 is configured to hold the shafts 212 of the blocks 210, and the blocks 210, that is, the shafts 212, are rotatable with the link assembly 202. Can be combined. Accordingly, the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 thereof, may be connected to each other as one body by the link assembly 202, thereby connecting the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to each other. In addition, the blocks 210 may be relatively rotated while being connected to each other by the link assembly 202, and accordingly, the hinge 200 may be formed by the movement of each of the blocks 210. (101,102) can be rotated relatively. In addition, the link assembly 202 may be disposed outside the display 151 so as not to interfere with the display 151 as shown in FIG. 10. As illustrated in FIG. 10, such a pair of first link assemblies 202 may be provided at both ends of the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210. Accordingly, the blocks ( 210) can be stably connected to each other. In the following, one of the components of the pair of link assemblies 202 will be described in detail, and this description applies equally to the corresponding components of the other link assembly 202.
이러한 링크 어셈블리들(202)중 어느 하나는 블록들(210) 모두를 한번에 연결하는 하나의 부재만으로 이루어질 수 있으며, 이러한 링크 어셈블리(202)에 의해서도 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 블록들(210)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)을 회동시키도록 변형 또는 운동할 수 있다. 한편, 일 예로써, 도시된 바와 같이, 블록들(210)의 더 원활한 상대운동을 위해 링크 어셈블리(202)는 다수개의 분리된 링크들(220,230)로 이루어질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 링크 어셈블리(202)는 도 7-도 10에 도시된 바와 같이, 서로 인접하는 한 쌍의 블록들(210)을 연결하도록 구성되는 제 1 링크(220)를 포함할 수 있다. 제 1 링크(220)는 도 12에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 소정 크기의 길게 연장된 몸체(221)을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 링크(220)는 몸체(221)에 형성되는 한 쌍의 슬롯(222a,222b)을 포함할 수 있다. 한 쌍의 슬롯(222a,222b)는 서로 소정 간격으로 이격되며, 몸체(221)를 관통하여 형성될 수 있다. 또한, 이들 슬롯들(222a,222b)은 서로 인접하는 한 쌍의 블록들(210)의 축들(212)을 회전가능하게 수용할 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 링크(210)에 의해 인접하는 한 쌍의 블록들(210)은 서로 안정적으로 연결되며, 동시에 상기 제 1 링크(210)에 상대적으로 회동할 수 있다. 링크 어셈블리(202)는 다수개의 제 1 링크(210)를 포함할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 도 10에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 링크(210)에 의해 연결되는 다수개의 블록들(210)의 쌍(pair)이 형성될 수 있다. Any one of these link assemblies 202 may consist of only one member connecting all of the blocks 210 at a time, and by this link assembly 202, the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 It can be deformed or moved to rotate the first and second bodies 101 and 102. Meanwhile, as an example, as shown, the link assembly 202 may include a plurality of separated links 220 and 230 for smoother relative motion of the blocks 210. In more detail, the link assembly 202 may include a first link 220 configured to connect a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other, as shown in FIGS. 7-10. The first link 220 may include an elongated body 221 having a predetermined size, as well illustrated in FIG. 12. In addition, the first link 220 may include a pair of slots 222a and 222b formed in the body 221. The pair of slots 222a and 222b are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and may be formed through the body 221. In addition, these slots 222a and 222b may rotatably accommodate the axes 212 of a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other. Accordingly, a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other by the first link 210 are stably connected to each other, and at the same time, they may rotate relatively to the first link 210. The link assembly 202 may include a plurality of first links 210, and thus, as well as shown in FIG. 10, a pair of a plurality of blocks 210 connected by the first link 210 (pair) can be formed.
이와 같은 제 1 링크(220)에 의한 다수개의 블록들(210)의 쌍들은 서로 분리되며, 이에 따라 이들 쌍들은 서로 연결될 필요가 있다. 이러한 이유로, 링크 어셈블리(202)는 이와 같이 제 1 링크(220)들에 형성되는 다수개의 블록들(210)의 쌍들중 서로 인접하는 두 개를 서로 연결하도록 구성되는 제 2 링크(230)를 포함할 수 있다. 도 10을 참조하면, 제 1 링크(220)에 의해 형성된 블록들(210)의 쌍들을 연결하도록 제 2 링크(230)는 제 1 링크(220)에 상대적으로 블록(210)의 길이방향 바깥쪽에 배치될 수 있으며, 제 1 링크(220)는 블록(210)의 몸체(211)에 인접하게 상대적으로 길이방향 안쪽에 배치될 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 링크(220)와 마찬가지로 다수개의 블록(210)의 쌍들을 연결하기 위해 다수개의 제 2 링크(230)가 적용될 수 있다. 이러한 제 2 링크(230)는 기본적으로 제 1 링크(220)와 유사한 구조를 가지며, 도 13에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 소정 크기의 길게 연장된 몸체(231)을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 링크(220)와 마찬가지로, 제 2 링크(230)는 몸체(231)에 형성되는 한 쌍의 슬롯(232a,232b)을 포함할 수 있다. 한 쌍의 슬롯(232a,232b)는 서로 소정 간격으로 이격되며, 몸체(231)를 관통하여 형성될 수 있다. 또한, 도 10에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 이들 슬롯들(232a,232b)은 서로 인접하는 블록(210)의 쌍들에서 서로 인접하는 축들(212)을 회전가능하게 수용할 수 있다. 제 1 링크(220)에 연결된 블록들(210)의 쌍들중 인접한 두 개의 쌍들이 제 2 링크(230)에 의해 서로 안정적으로 연결될 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 및 제 2 링크(220,230)에 의해 블록들(210)은 힌지(200)를 위한 단일의 몸체를 형성할 수 있다. 또한, 블록들(210)은 제 1 링크(220)에 의해 상대적으로 회동할 수 있으며, 동시에, 제 2 링크(230)에 의해 블록들(210) 쌍들도 서로 상대적으로 회동할 수 있다. 따라서, 이와 같은 상대적인 회동들에 의해 힌지(200), 즉 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)는 도 8에 도시된 바와 같이, 소정의 곡률 및 곡률반경(R)을 갖도록 크게 변형될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 마주하도록, 즉 제 1 상태로 전환되도록 이에 연결된 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)을 회동시킬 수 있다. 다른 한편, 도 9에 도시된 바와 같이, 힌지(200), 즉, 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)는 중앙부를 중심으로 크게 회동할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102b)이 마주하도록, 즉 제 3 상태로 전환되도록 이에 연결된 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)을 회동시킬 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 및 제 3 상태로의 전환을 위한 힌지(200) 또는 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)의 거동(behavior)는 본 명세서 내에서 나중에 보다 상세하게 설명된다.The pairs of the plurality of blocks 210 by the first link 220 are separated from each other, and accordingly, the pairs need to be connected to each other. For this reason, the link assembly 202 includes a second link 230 configured to connect two adjacent pairs of a plurality of blocks 210 formed on the first links 220 as described above. can do. Referring to FIG. 10, the second link 230 is located outside the first link 220 in the length direction of the block 210 so as to connect pairs of blocks 210 formed by the first link 220. The first link 220 may be disposed adjacent to the body 211 of the block 210 and may be disposed relatively inward in the longitudinal direction. Also, like the first link 220, a plurality of second links 230 may be applied to connect pairs of a plurality of blocks 210. The second link 230 has a structure similar to that of the first link 220, and may include an elongated body 231 having a predetermined size, as well illustrated in FIG. 13. Further, like the first link 220, the second link 230 may include a pair of slots 232a and 232b formed in the body 231. The pair of slots 232a and 232b are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and may be formed through the body 231. In addition, as well illustrated in FIG. 10, these slots 232a and 232b may rotatably accommodate axes 212 adjacent to each other in pairs of blocks 210 adjacent to each other. Two adjacent pairs of the pairs of blocks 210 connected to the first link 220 may be stably connected to each other by the second link 230. Accordingly, the blocks 210 may form a single body for the hinge 200 by the first and second links 220 and 230. In addition, the blocks 210 may rotate relatively by the first link 220, and at the same time, the pairs of blocks 210 may also rotate relative to each other by the second link 230. Accordingly, the hinge 200, that is, its block assembly 201, can be greatly deformed to have a predetermined curvature and a radius of curvature R as shown in FIG. 8 by such relative rotations. The first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto may be rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b face each other, that is, to switch to the first state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the hinge 200, that is, its block assembly 201, can be largely rotated around the central portion, and accordingly, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102b face each other. In other words, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto may be rotated so as to be converted to a third state. The behavior of the hinge 200 or the block assembly 201 thereof for the transition to these first and third states will be described in more detail later in this specification.
또한, 힌지(200)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102), 정확하게는 이의 측부들(101c,102c)사이에서 배치되는 스토퍼(250)(stopper)를 포함할 수 있다. 상세하게는(particularly), 스토퍼(250)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102), 즉 측부들(101c,102c)사이의 공간의 중앙부에 배치될 수 있다. 또한, 스토퍼(250)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)사이에서 이동 가능하도록 구성될 수 있다. 실제적으로 스토퍼(250)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)사이에서 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 이의 블록들(210)에 수직한 방향으로 이동가능하게 구성될 수 있다. 이와 같은 이동가능한 구성(configuration)에 의해, 스토퍼(250)는 선택적으로 블록 어셈블리(201)의 블록들(210)사이에 개재되도록 구성될 수 있다. 즉, 스토퍼(250)는 이동하면서, 블록 어셈블리(201)의 중앙부에 배치되며 서로 인접하는 한 쌍의 블록들(210)사이에 삽입되거나 이러한 한 쌍의 블록들(210)사이의 공간으로부터 이탈될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 도 7-도 9에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 블록 어셈블리(201)에서 중앙부에 배치되는 한 쌍의 블록들(210)은 서로 소정 간격으로 이격되며, 스토퍼(250)는 상기 간격내에 이동해 들어가거나(move in) 이러한 간격으로부터 이동해 나올 수(move out) 있다. 이러한 스토퍼(250)의 이동은 사용자에 의해 수동으로 수행될 수 있으며, 후술되는 연동 메커니즘(interlock mechanism)(300)에 의해 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회동과 연동하여 수행될 수도 있다. In addition, the hinge 200 may include a stopper 250 disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and precisely the side portions 101c and 102c thereof. Particularly, the stopper 250 may be disposed at the center of the space between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, that is, the side portions 101c and 102c. In addition, the stopper 250 may be configured to be movable between the first and second bodies 101 and 102. In practice, the stopper 250 may be configured to be movable between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in a direction perpendicular to the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 thereof. With such a movable configuration, the stopper 250 may be selectively configured to be interposed between the blocks 210 of the block assembly 201. That is, while the stopper 250 moves, it is disposed at the center of the block assembly 201 and is inserted between a pair of blocks 210 adjacent to each other or separated from the space between the pair of blocks 210. I can. More specifically, as well as shown in FIGS. 7-9, a pair of blocks 210 disposed at the center of the block assembly 201 are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance, and the stopper 250 is It can move in or move out of these gaps. The movement of the stopper 250 may be performed manually by a user, or may be performed in conjunction with rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 by an interlock mechanism 300 to be described later.
보다 상세하게는, 스토퍼(250)는 도 15에 도시된 바와 같이, 길게 연장되는 몸체(251)와 상기 몸체(251)의 길이방향 양 끝단들에 각각 제공되는 축들(252)을 포함할 수 있다. 스토퍼(250)가 블록들(210)사이에 삽입될 때, 몸체(251)는 인접하는 블록들(210)과 함께 디스플레이(151)의 표면과 접촉하면서 이를 지지하도록 구성될 수 있다. 또한, 이들 축(252)은 스토퍼(250), 즉 이의 몸체(251)의 길이방향 중심축상에 배열되며 상기 중심축을 따라 연장될 수 있다. 이러한 스토퍼(250)의 중심축은 몸체들(101,102)의 측부들(101c,102c) 또는 상기 몸체들(101,102)의 사이에 배치되는 회동축에 나란하게 배열될 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이에 삽입될 때, 인접하는 블록들(210)과 정렬될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이들 블록들(210)과 원활하게 연동할 수 있다. 이와 같이, 스토퍼(250)는 구조적으로 블록들(210)과 유사하도록 구성되므로, 블록들(210)사이에 삽입될 때, 하나의 블록(210)으로써 블록 어셈블리(201)를 형성할 수 있다. In more detail, as shown in FIG. 15, the stopper 250 may include a body 251 extending elongated and shafts 252 provided at both ends of the body 251 in the longitudinal direction. . When the stopper 250 is inserted between the blocks 210, the body 251 may be configured to contact and support the surface of the display 151 together with the adjacent blocks 210. In addition, these shafts 252 are arranged on a longitudinal central axis of the stopper 250, that is, its body 251, and may extend along the central axis. The central axis of the stopper 250 may be arranged in parallel with the side portions 101c and 102c of the bodies 101 and 102 or a rotational shaft disposed between the bodies 101 and 102. Accordingly, when the stopper 250 is inserted between the blocks 210, it can be aligned with the adjacent blocks 210, and thus can smoothly interwork with the blocks 210. As described above, since the stopper 250 is structurally similar to the blocks 210, when inserted between the blocks 210, the block assembly 201 may be formed as one block 210.
더 나아가, 힌지(200)는 앞서 설명된 스토퍼(250)를 지지하며, 상기 스토퍼(250)의 이동을 안내하도록 구성되는 홀더(holder)(240)를 포함할 수 있다. 홀더(240)는 스토퍼(250)를 안내하기 위해 마찬가지로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102), 정확하게는 이의 측부들(101c,102c)사이에서 배치될 수 있으며, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102), 즉 측부들(101c,102c)사이의 공간의 중앙부에 배치될 수 있다. 또한, 블록 어셈블리(201)에서 중앙부에 배치되는 한 쌍의 블록들(210)은 서로 소정 간격으로 이격되며, 홀더(240)는 이러한 간격내에, 즉 상기 블록들(210)사이에 배치될 수 있으며, 이러한 한 쌍의 블록들(210)과 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 홀더(240)는 블록들(210) 및 스토퍼(250)의 길이방향 끝단들에 배치될 수 있다. 또한, 홀더(240)는 이동 단말기(100)의 측방향(lateral direction)으로 제 1 링크들(220)과 일렬로 배치될 수 있다. 따라서, 홀더(240)는 제 1 링크(220)로써 블록들(210)을 연결하는 링크 어셈블리(202)로 기능할 수 있으며, 스토퍼(250)를 이러한 블록들(210), 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)와 기능적 및 구조적으로 연계하도록 구성될 수 있다. 이와 같은 한 쌍의 홀더(240)가 도 10에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 중앙부의 인접 블록들(210)뿐만 아니라 스토퍼(250)의 길이방향 양 끝단들에 각각 제공될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 그와 같은 블록들(210) 및 스토퍼(250)를 안정적으로 지지할 수 있다. Further, the hinge 200 supports the stopper 250 described above and may include a holder 240 configured to guide the movement of the stopper 250. The holder 240 may likewise be disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, precisely its sides 101c and 102c, to guide the stopper 250, and the first and second bodies ( 101, 102), that is, may be disposed in the center of the space between the sides (101c, 102c). In addition, a pair of blocks 210 disposed at the center of the block assembly 201 are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and the holder 240 may be disposed within such a distance, that is, between the blocks 210. , It may be rotatably coupled with the pair of blocks 210. In more detail, the holder 240 may be disposed at longitudinal ends of the blocks 210 and the stopper 250. Further, the holder 240 may be arranged in line with the first links 220 in a lateral direction of the mobile terminal 100. Accordingly, the holder 240 may function as the link assembly 202 connecting the blocks 210 as the first link 220, and the stopper 250 is referred to as the blocks 210, that is, the block assembly 201. ) And functionally and structurally. Such a pair of holders 240 are provided at both ends of the stopper 250 in the longitudinal direction as well as the block assembly 201, that is, adjacent blocks 210 at the center, as well illustrated in FIG. In this way, the blocks 210 and the stopper 250 can be stably supported.
보다 상세하게는, 도 14를 참조하면, 홀더(240)는 기본적으로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에 배치되는 몸체(241)을 포함할 수 있다. 홀더(240), 즉 이의 몸체(241)은 도 7에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 수평하게 서로 동일 평면(flush)상에 배치될 때, 이들의 측부(101c,102c)에 나란하게 길게 연장될 수 있다. 또한, 홀더(240), 즉 이의 몸체(241)는 도 8 및 도 9에 도시된 이동 단말기(100)의 접힌 상태에서 몸체(101,102) 또는 이의 표면들(101a,101b,102a,102b)과 대체적으로 나란하게 배향될 수 있다. 이러한 홀더(240)는 몸체(410)에 형성되는 한 쌍의 슬롯(242a,242b) 및 상기 슬롯들(242a,242b)사이에 배치되는 중앙 슬롯(243)을 포함할 수 있다. 슬롯들(242a,242b,243)은 서로 소정 간격으로 이격되며, 몸체(410)를 관통하여 형성될 수 있다. 한 쌍의 슬롯(242a,242b)은 몸체(241)의 양 측부에 각각 배치되며, 홀더(240)에 인접하는 블록들(210)의 축들(212)을 회전가능하게 수용할 수 있다. 또한, 중앙 슬롯(243)은 몸체(241)와 실질적으로 동일한 방향으로 연장될 수 있다. 즉, 중앙 슬롯(243)은 수평하게 서로 동일 평면(flush)상에 배치되는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 측부(101c,102c)에 나란하게 길게 연장될 수 있다. 이러한 중앙 슬롯(243)은 스토퍼(250)의 축(252)을 수용할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이와 같이 길게 연장된 슬롯(243)을 따라 스토퍼(250)가 이동할 수 있다. 특히, 슬롯(242a,242b)에 결합된 블록들(210)사이에 스토퍼(250)가 배치될 수 있도록, 적어도 중앙슬롯(243)의 끝단은 상기 슬롯(242a,242b)사이에 배치될 수 있다. 따라서, 이러한 중앙슬롯(243)을 따라, 스토퍼(250)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)사이에서 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 이의 블록들(210)에 수직한 방향으로 이동할 수 있다. 즉, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이에 삽입(insert)되게 블록 어셈블리(201)을 향해 이동하거나 블록들(210)로부터 인출(withdraw)되게 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터 멀어지게 이동할 수 있다. More specifically, referring to FIG. 14, the holder 240 may basically include a body 241 disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102. The holder 240, that is, its body 241, as well as shown in FIG. 7, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are horizontally disposed on the same plane (flush), their side portions 101c ,102c) can be elongated in parallel. In addition, the holder 240, that is, its body 241, in the folded state of the mobile terminal 100 shown in Figs. 8 and 9, the body (101, 102) or its surfaces (101a, 101b, 102a, 102b) and the alternative Can be oriented side by side. The holder 240 may include a pair of slots 242a and 242b formed in the body 410 and a central slot 243 disposed between the slots 242a and 242b. The slots 242a, 242b, and 243 may be spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and may be formed through the body 410. The pair of slots 242a and 242b are disposed on both sides of the body 241, respectively, and may rotatably accommodate the axes 212 of the blocks 210 adjacent to the holder 240. In addition, the central slot 243 may extend in substantially the same direction as the body 241. That is, the central slot 243 may be horizontally extended in parallel to the side portions 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 disposed on the same plane (flush) with each other. The central slot 243 may accommodate the shaft 252 of the stopper 250, and accordingly, the stopper 250 may move along the slot 243 that is elongated. In particular, at least the end of the center slot 243 may be disposed between the slots 242a and 242b so that the stopper 250 may be disposed between the blocks 210 coupled to the slots 242a and 242b. . Accordingly, along this central slot 243, the stopper 250 may move in a direction perpendicular to the block assembly 201, that is, its blocks 210 between the first and second bodies 101 and 102. That is, the stopper 250 may move toward the block assembly 201 to be inserted between the blocks 210 or may move away from the block assembly 201 to be withdrawn from the blocks 210. .
앞서 설명된 구성에 의해, 홀더(240) 및 스토퍼(250), 이들중 특히 홀더(240)는 몸체들(101,102)사이의 공간 또는 이러한 공간내에 배치된 블록 어셈블리(201)의 중앙부에 배치되며, 힌지(200)의 변형 또는 회동과 관련된 중심으로서 작용할 수 있다. 따라서, 이들 홀더(240) 및 스토퍼(250)는 블록 어셈블리(201)를 이에 회동가능하게 연결되는 두 개의 부위, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)에 각각 연결된 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)로 분할할 수 있다. 즉, 힌지(200)는 제 1 몸체(101)에 연결되며 홀더(240)에 회동가능하게 결합되는 제 1 블록 어셈블리(210a) 및 제 2 몸체(102)에 연결되며 상기 홀더(240)에 회동가능하게 결합되는 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210b)를 포함할 수 있다. By the configuration described above, the holder 240 and the stopper 250, in particular, the holder 240 is disposed in the space between the bodies 101 and 102 or the central portion of the block assembly 201 disposed in this space, It may act as a center associated with the deformation or rotation of the hinge 200. Accordingly, the holder 240 and the stopper 250 are two portions rotatably connected to the block assembly 201, that is, the first and second block assemblies connected to the first and second bodies 101 and 102, respectively. It can be divided into (210a, 210b). That is, the hinge 200 is connected to the first body 101 and is connected to the first block assembly 210a and the second body 102 rotatably coupled to the holder 240 and rotates to the holder 240 It may include a second block assembly 210b coupled to each other.
앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 힌지(200)는 기본적으로 큰 곡률을 갖도록 변형되거나 이의 중심부에 대해 크게 회동(pivot)함으로써 이에 연결된 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)를 회동시킬 수 있다. 힌지(200)는 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)의 회동이 보다 원활하게 수행되도록, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)에 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 힌지(200)는 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)의 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)에 연결되도록 배치되므로, 실제적으로 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)에 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 도 7-도 10에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)은 디스플레이(151)를 지지하도록 구성되는 제 1 및 제 2 서포터(101f,102f)를 포함할 수 있다. 제 1 서포터(101f)는 제 1 또는 제 2 면(101a,101b)에 대체적으로 평행하게 연장되는 몸체를 가질 수 있으며, 유사하게 제 2 서포터(102f)는 제 3 또는 제 4 면(102a,102b)에 대체적으로 평행하게 연장되는 몸체를 가질 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 서포터(101f,102f)는 디스플레이(151)를 수용하는 리세스(101e,102e)(도 4 참조)의 바닥면을 형성하며, 이에 따라 디스플레이(151)와 접촉하면서 이를 지지할 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 및 제 2 서포터(101f,102f)는 몸체(101,102)의 측부들(101c,102c) 또는 지(200)와 인접하며 이의 끝단에 제공되는 힌지(101g,102g)을 각각 포함할 수 있다. 힌지(200), 즉 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)의 양 측부는 이에 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 블록 어셈블리(201)의 블록들(210)중 몸체(101,102)의 측부들(101c,102c)과 인접하는 최외곽 블록들(210)의 축들(211)이 제 1 및 제 2 서포터(101f,102f)의 힌지(101g,102g)들에 각각 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 따라서, 도 8 및 도 9에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 변형되거나 회동된 힌지(200)의 양 끝단으로부터 서로 더 가까워지도록 추가적으로 회동할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 만나거나 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 만나도록 이동 단말기(100)가 원활하게 접힐 수 있다. As described above, the hinge 200 may be deformed to have a large curvature or may pivot the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto by largely pivoting about the center thereof. The hinge 200 may be rotatably coupled to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 so that the rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 is performed more smoothly. Since the hinge 200 is arranged to be connected to the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, it is actually rotated on the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a. It can be possibly combined. In more detail, as shown in FIGS. 7-10, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 include first and second supporters 101f and 102f configured to support the display 151. I can. The first supporter 101f may have a body extending substantially parallel to the first or second surfaces 101a, 101b, and similarly, the second supporter 102f may have a third or fourth surface 102a, 102b ) May have a body extending substantially parallel to it. These first and second supporters 101f and 102f form the bottom surfaces of the recesses 101e and 102e (see Fig. 4) for accommodating the display 151, thereby supporting them while in contact with the display 151. can do. In addition, the first and second supporters (101f, 102f) may include hinges (101g, 102g) that are adjacent to the sides (101c, 102c) or the paper (200) of the body (101, 102) and provided at the ends thereof. have. The hinge 200, that is, both sides of the block assembly 201 thereof, may be rotatably coupled thereto. In more detail, of the blocks 210 of the block assembly 201, the axes 211 of the outermost blocks 210 adjacent to the side portions 101c and 102c of the body 101 and 102 are the first and second It may be rotatably coupled to the hinges 101g and 102g of the supporters 101f and 102f, respectively. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may additionally rotate to be closer to each other from both ends of the deformed or rotated hinge 200, and thus the second and The mobile terminal 100 may be smoothly folded so that the fourth surfaces 101b and 102b meet or the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a meet.
한편, 도 8을 참조하면, 힌지(200)가 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4) 방향으로의 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회동을 위해 곡률을 갖도록 변형되는 경우, 즉, 제 1 상태로의 전환을 위해 제 2 및 제 4 면(101b,102b)을 가까워지거나 마주하게 하는 경우, 블록 어셈블리, 즉 블록들(210)의 곡률반경(R) 방향 안쪽(inward)부위는 상대적으로 압축될 수 있다. 따라서, 힌지(200)의 원활한 변형을 위해서는 블록 어셈블리(201), 즉 블록들(210)이 이러한 상대적인 압축을 허용하도록 구성될 필요가 있다. 이와 관련하여, 도 11를 참조하면, 블록(210)은 상대적으로 제 1 또는 제3 면(101a,102a)에 인접하는 제 1 부위(portion)(또는 제 1 면)(211a) 및 상기 제 1 부위(211a)와 이격되며 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접하는 제 2 부위(또는 제 2 면)(211b)를 포함할 수 있다. 도 8에 도시된 블록(210)의 배치를 고려할 때, 제 1 부위(211a)가 상대적으로 곡률반경(R)방향에서 바깥쪽에 위치하며, 제 2 부위(211b)가 상대적으로 곡률반경(R)방향에서 안쪽에 위치할 수 있다. 제 1 부위(211a)는 제 2 부위(211b)보다 크게 형성될 수 있으며, 바꿔 말하면, 제 1 부위(211a)의 길이 또는 폭이 제 2 부위(211b)의 길이 또는 폭보다 크게 형성될 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 부위(211a,211b)로 인해 블록(210)의 측부들(211c)은 안쪽방향으로(inwardly) 경사질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 블록(210)의 측부들(211c)은 제 1 또는 제3 면(101a,102a)로부터(즉, 제 1 부위(211a)로부터) 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)(즉, 제 2 부위(211b))을 향해 연장되면서 안쪽으로 점차적으로 가까워지게 경사질 수 있다. 따라서, 블록(210)은 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)을 향해 연장되면서(즉, 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b) 방향으로) 점차적으로 축소되는 단면을 갖도록 구성될 수 있다. 결과적으로, 블록(210)은 역 사다리꼴 형상의 단면을 가질 수 있으며, 이러한 단면의 긴변이 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)에 인접하게 배치되며, 이의 짧은 변이 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접하게 배치될 수 있다. 더 나아가, 이러한 형상으로 인해, 어느 한 블록(210)의 측부(211c)는 인접한 다른 블록(210)의 측부(211c)으로 멀어지게 경사질 수 있으며, 이에 따라 인접하는 블록들(210)의 측부들(211c)사이에는 소정의 간격이 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,101b)에 인접하게 형성될 수 있다. 즉, 블록들(210)의 제 2 부위(211b)사이에는 간격들이 형성될 수 있으며, 각 간격은 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)으로 갈 수록 점차적으로 감소될 수 있다. Meanwhile, referring to FIG. 8, when the hinge 200 is deformed to have a curvature for rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the third and fourth directions (R3, R4), that is, the first When the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are brought close to or facing each other for transition to the 1 state, the block assembly, that is, the inward portion in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 is relatively Can be compressed. Therefore, in order to smoothly deform the hinge 200, the block assembly 201, that is, the blocks 210 needs to be configured to allow such relative compression. In this regard, referring to FIG. 11, the block 210 is a first portion (or first surface) 211a relatively adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a and the first A second portion (or second surface) 211b may be spaced apart from the portion 211a and adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. When considering the arrangement of the block 210 shown in FIG. 8, the first portion 211a is relatively positioned outside in the direction of the radius of curvature (R), and the second portion 211b is relatively the radius of curvature (R). It can be located inside from the direction. The first portion 211a may be formed larger than the second portion 211b, in other words, the length or width of the first portion 211a may be formed larger than the length or width of the second portion 211b. . Due to the first and second portions 211a and 211b, the side portions 211c of the block 210 may be inclined inwardly. More specifically, the sides 211c of the block 210 are from the first or third side 101a, 102a (i.e., from the first portion 211a) and the second or fourth side 101b, 102b (That is, while extending toward the second portion 211b), it may be inclined to gradually approach inward. Thus, the block 210 extends from the first or third surface 101a, 102a toward the second or fourth surface 101b, 102b (ie, in the direction of the second or fourth surface 101b, 102b). ) It can be configured to have a cross section that gradually shrinks. As a result, the block 210 may have a cross-section of an inverted trapezoidal shape, and the long side of this cross-section is disposed adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a, and the short side thereof is the second or fourth side ( 101b, 102b) can be arranged adjacent to. Further, due to this shape, the side portion 211c of one block 210 may be inclined away from the side portion 211c of the adjacent block 210, and accordingly, the side portion of the adjacent blocks 210 A predetermined gap may be formed between the fields 211c adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 101b. That is, gaps may be formed between the second portions 211b of the blocks 210, and each gap is from the first or third surfaces 101a, 102a to the second or fourth surfaces 101b, 102b. It can gradually decrease as you go.
또한, 스토퍼(250)도 도 8에 도시된 바와 같이, 중앙 블록들(210)사이에, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(201:210a,210b)사이에 배치되는 경우, 블록 어셈블리(201)와 마찬가지로, 힌지(200)의 소정 곡률을 위한 변형에 의해 스토퍼(250)의 곡률반경(R) 방향 안쪽(inward)부위는 상대적으로 압축될 수 있다. 따라서, 힌지(200)의 원활한 변형을 위해 스토퍼(250)도 이러한 상대적인 압축을 허용하도록 구성될 수 있다. 도 15를 참조하면, 스토퍼(250)는 상대적으로 제 1 또는 제3 면(101a,102a)에 인접하는 제 1 부위(portion)(또는 제 1 면)(251a) 및 상기 제 1 부위(251a)와 이격되며 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접하는 제 2 부위(또는 제 2 면)(251b)를 포함할 수 있다. 앞서 설명된 블록(210)과 마찬가지로, 제 1 부위(251a)가 상대적으로 곡률반경(R)방향에서 바깥쪽에 위치하며, 제 2 부위(251b)가 상대적으로 곡률반경(R)방향에서 안쪽에 위치할 수 있다. 제 1 부위(251a)는 제 2 부위(251b)보다 크게 형성될 수 있으며, 바꿔 말하면, 제 1 부위(251a)의 길이 또는 폭이 제 2 부위(251b)의 길이 또는 폭보다 크게 형성될 수 있다. 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 부위(251a,251b)로 인해 스토퍼(250)의 측부들(251c)은 안쪽방향으로(inwardly) 경사질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 스토퍼(250)의 측부들(251c)은 제 1 또는 제3 면(101a,102a)로부터(즉, 제 1 부위(211a)로부터) 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)(즉, 제 2 부위(211b))을 향해 연장되면서 안쪽으로 점차적으로 가까워지게 경사질 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)는 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)을 향해 연장되면서(즉, 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b) 방향으로) 점차적으로 축소되는 단면을 갖도록 구성될 수 있다. 결과적으로, 스토퍼(250)도 블록(210)과 유사하게 역 사다리꼴 형상의 단면을 가질 수 있으며, 이러한 단면의 긴변이 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)에 인접하게 배치되며, 이의 짧은 변이 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접하게 배치될 수 있다. 더 나아가, 이러한 형상으로 인해, 스토퍼(250)의 측부(251c)는 인접한 블록(210)의 측부(211c)로 멀어지게 경사질 수 있으며, 이에 따라 스토퍼(250)와 이에 인접하는 블록들(210)사이에는 소정의 간격이 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,101b)에 인접하게 형성될 수 있다. 즉, 스토퍼(250)와 이에 인접하는 블록들(210)의 제 2 부위(251b,211b)사이에는 간격들이 형성될 수 있으며, 각 간격은 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)으로 갈수록 점차적으로 감소될 수 있다. 한편, 스토퍼(250)는 몸체(251)의 양 측부에 제공되는 챔퍼(chamfer)(253)을 포함할 수 있다. 이러한 챔퍼(253)은 스토퍼(250)가 이동중에 인접하는 블록들(210)과 간섭하지 않게 하도록 구성될 수 있다. 이를 위해, 챔퍼(253)은 이의 제 1 부위(251a)에 인접하게 배치되며, 측부(251c)와 연결될 수 있다. 또한, 이러한 챔퍼(253)은 측부(251c)와 반대되게 경사지도록 형성될 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)가 블럭들(210)사이에 삽입되거나 이들로부터 인출될 때, 챔퍼(253)는 측부(251c)와 같은 방향으로 경사진 블럭들(210)의 측부들(211c)와 간섭하지 않을 수 있으며, 이에 따라, 스토퍼(250)는 원활하게 삽입 및 인출될 수 있다. In addition, when the stopper 250 is also disposed between the central blocks 210, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 201: 210a and 210b, as shown in FIG. 8, the block assembly 201 Like ), by deformation for a predetermined curvature of the hinge 200, an inward portion of the stopper 250 in the direction of the radius of curvature R may be relatively compressed. Therefore, for smooth deformation of the hinge 200, the stopper 250 may also be configured to allow such relative compression. Referring to FIG. 15, the stopper 250 has a first portion (or first surface) 251a and the first portion 251a relatively adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a. It is spaced apart from and may include a second portion (or second surface) 251b adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. Like the block 210 described above, the first portion 251a is relatively located outside in the direction of the radius of curvature (R), and the second portion 251b is relatively located in the direction of the radius of curvature (R). can do. The first portion 251a may be formed larger than the second portion 251b, in other words, the length or width of the first portion 251a may be larger than the length or width of the second portion 251b. . Due to these first and second portions 251a and 251b, the side portions 251c of the stopper 250 may be inclined inwardly. More specifically, the side portions 251c of the stopper 250 are from the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a (ie, from the first portion 211a) and the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. (That is, while extending toward the second portion 211b), it may be inclined to gradually approach inward. Accordingly, the stopper 250 extends from the first or third surfaces 101a, 102a toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b, 102b (ie, in the direction of the second or fourth surfaces 101b, 102b). ) It can be configured to have a cross section that gradually shrinks. As a result, the stopper 250 may also have an inverted trapezoidal cross-section similar to the block 210, and the long side of this cross-section is disposed adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a, 102a, and the short side thereof It may be disposed adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. Further, due to this shape, the side portion 251c of the stopper 250 may be inclined away from the side portion 211c of the adjacent block 210, and accordingly, the stopper 250 and the blocks 210 adjacent thereto ), a predetermined gap may be formed adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 101b. That is, gaps may be formed between the stopper 250 and the second portions 251b and 211b of the blocks 210 adjacent thereto, and each gap is a second from the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a. Alternatively, it may be gradually decreased toward the fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. Meanwhile, the stopper 250 may include chamfers 253 provided on both sides of the body 251. The chamfer 253 may be configured so that the stopper 250 does not interfere with adjacent blocks 210 during movement. To this end, the chamfer 253 is disposed adjacent to the first portion 251a thereof, and may be connected to the side portion 251c. In addition, the chamfer 253 may be formed to be inclined opposite to the side portion 251c. Accordingly, when the stopper 250 is inserted between or withdrawn from the blocks 210, the chamfer 253 interferes with the side portions 211c of the blocks 210 inclined in the same direction as the side portion 251c. Otherwise, the stopper 250 may be smoothly inserted and withdrawn.
이와 같은 블록(210) 및 스토퍼(250)의 형상적 구성(configuration)하에서, 도 7에 도시된 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태(제 2 상태)에서, 중앙부의 블록들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에는 충분한 간격이 형성될 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)는 홀더(240)의 슬롯(243)을 따라 이동하여 블럭들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)사이에 삽입 또는 개재될 수 있다. 이러한 삽입은 또한, 블록 어셈블리(201)로의 삽입으로 설명될 수도 있다. 개재된 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)과 함께 디스플레이(151)를 지지할 수 있다. 또한, 스토퍼(250)는 인접한 중앙 블록들(210), 즉 이의 측부들(211c)을 지지하며, 이에 따라 이동 단말기(100)의 제 2 상태를 유지할 수 있다. 특히, 스토퍼(250)의 챔퍼(253)는 블럭들(210)의 측부들(211c)와 반대되게 경사지므로, 이러한 측부들(211c)와 넓게 접촉할 수 있으며, 이에 따라(thus) 스토퍼(250)에 인접한 블록들(210)을 안정적으로 지지할 수 있다. 한편, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b) 대신에, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 가까워지도록, 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)에 힘이 가해질 수 있다. 이러한 힘은 이동 단말기(100)의 사용중 외부의 충격이나 사용자의 오작동에 의해 가해질 수 있다. 만일 펼쳐진 디스플레이(151)를 사용중에 의도치 않게 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 가까워지거나 마주하게 몸체들(101,102)가 회동하고 디스플레이(151)가 접혀지면, 사용자는 불편을 겪을 수 있다. 그러나, 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 챔퍼(253)는 블록(210)의 측부(211c)와 반대되게 경사지므로, 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로의 힘에 의해 상기 측부들(211c)과 직접적으로 접촉하면서 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 블록들(210)들 및 이에 연결된 몸체들(101,102)의 추가적인 회동을 허용하지 않을 수 있다. 즉, 힌지(200), 즉 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)는 이러한 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동을 허용하도록 변형될 수 없다. 따라서, 이러한 스토퍼(250)의 구성에 의해, 스토퍼(250)가 블럭들(210), 정확하게는 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에 삽입되는 경우, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 서로 가까와지거나 더 나아가 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)이 회동하는 것이 방지될 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로의 회동방지로 인해, 의도치 않은 디스플레이(151)의 접힘이 방지될 수 있다. Under such a configuration of the block 210 and the stopper 250, in the unfolded state (second state) of the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 7, between the blocks 210 in the center, that is, A sufficient gap may be formed between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. Accordingly, the stopper 250 may be inserted or interposed between the blocks 210 by moving along the slot 243 of the holder 240, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. This insertion may also be described as insertion into the block assembly 201. The interposed stopper 250 may support the display 151 together with the blocks 210. In addition, the stopper 250 supports adjacent central blocks 210, that is, the side portions 211c thereof, and accordingly, the second state of the mobile terminal 100 can be maintained. In particular, since the chamfer 253 of the stopper 250 is inclined opposite to the side portions 211c of the blocks 210, it can be in wide contact with the side portions 211c, and accordingly (thus) the stopper 250 Blocks 210 adjacent to) may be stably supported. On the other hand, in place of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b, the first and second bodies ( 101,102) may be applied. Such a force may be applied by an external shock or a user's malfunction during use of the mobile terminal 100. If the bodies 101 and 102 are rotated and the display 151 is folded so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are unintentionally approached or faced while using the unfolded display 151, the user may experience inconvenience. have. However, as described above, since the chamfer 253 is inclined opposite to the side portion 211c of the block 210, the side portions 211c ) May not allow additional rotation of the blocks 210 and the bodies 101 and 102 connected thereto in the first and second directions R1 and R2 while directly in contact with each other. That is, the hinge 200, that is, its block assembly 201, cannot be deformed to allow rotation in the first and second directions R1 and R2. Therefore, by the configuration of the stopper 250, when the stopper 250 is inserted between the blocks 210, specifically the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b, the first and third surfaces ( Rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may be prevented so that 101a and 102a) are close to each other or further face each other. Due to the prevention of rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the first and second directions R1 and R2, unintentional folding of the display 151 may be prevented.
한편, 도 7에 도시된 스토퍼(250)이 블록들(210), 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에 개재되고 이동 단말기(100) 펼쳐진 상태(제 2 상태)에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지도록 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하면, 도 8에 도시된 바와 같이, 블록들(210)사이의 간격은 감소될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하면, 앞서 설명된 형상적 구성으로 인해 블록들(210)는 서로를 향해 상대적 회동하며, 측부들(211c)는 서로 가까워질 수 있다. 또한, 인접한 블록들(210)도 스토퍼(250)를 향해 상대적으로 회동하며, 측부들(251c,211c)는 서로 가까와질 수 있다. 특히, 블록들(210)의 곡률반경(R)방향 안쪽(inward)에 배치된 부위, 즉 제 2 부위들(211b)이 서로 가까워지며, 블록들(210)의 측부들(211c)이 전체적으로 서로 접촉할 수 있다. 또한, 블록들(210)과 스토퍼(250)의 곡률반경(R)방향 안쪽(inward)에 배치된 부위, 즉 제 2 부위들(211b,251b)이 서로 가까워지며, 이들의 측부들(211c,251c)이 전체적으로 서로 접촉할 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(102,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지도록 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하면, 힌지(200), 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)는 전체적으로 수축하도록 구성될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 힌지(200), 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)의 곡률반경방향의 안쪽부위(즉, 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접한 부위)가 수축할 수 있다. 이러한 수축에 의해 변형된 힌지(200) 즉, 제 1 블록 어셈블리(201)의 원주방향으로의 길이가 감소될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이러한 감소는 반경(R)방향 안쪽에서의 압축을 허용할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 8에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 마주하게 회동시키도록, 즉 이동 단말기(100)을 제 1 상태로 전환시키도록, 힌지(200)는 큰 곡률을 형성하면서 안정적으로 변형될 수 있다. 또한, 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이에 개재되면서 동일하게 하나의 블록(210)으로써 다른 블록(210)과 연동하며, 이에 따라 앞서 설명된 바와 같은 힌지(200)의 변형을 가능하게 할 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에 개재될 때, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지거나 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하는 것을 허용하도록 구성될 수 있다. Meanwhile, in a state in which the stopper 250 illustrated in FIG. 7 is interposed between the blocks 210, that is, the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b and the mobile terminal 100 is unfolded (the second state), When the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b become close, as shown in FIG. 8, the blocks 210 ) Can be reduced. More specifically, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate in the third and fourth directions (R3, R4), the blocks 210 rotate relative to each other due to the above-described shape configuration. , The side portions 211c may be close to each other. Further, adjacent blocks 210 also rotate relatively toward the stopper 250, and the side portions 251c and 211c may be close to each other. In particular, portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210, that is, the second portions 211b are close to each other, and the side portions 211c of the blocks 210 are I can contact you. In addition, portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 and the stopper 250, that is, the second portions 211b and 251b are close to each other, and their side portions 211c, 251c) may contact each other as a whole. Accordingly, when the first and second bodies 102 and 102 rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b become close, the hinge 200, that is, the block assembly ( 201) can be configured to contract as a whole. More specifically, the hinge 200, that is, the inner portion of the block assembly 201 in the radius of curvature direction (ie, the portion adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b) may be contracted. The length in the circumferential direction of the hinge 200, that is, the first block assembly 201 deformed by this contraction, may be reduced, and thus, this reduction may allow compression in the radial (R) direction. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b face each other, that is, the mobile terminal 100 is switched to the first state. To make it possible, the hinge 200 can be stably deformed while forming a large curvature. In addition, as described above, the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210 and is identically interlocked with the other block 210 as one block 210, and accordingly, the hinge 200 as described above. ) Can be transformed. Therefore, when the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are formed to be closer to or facing each other. It may be configured to allow the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4.
다른 한편, 도 8에 도시된 스토퍼(250)가 개재되면서 이동 단말기(100)가 접혀진 상태(제 1 상태)에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 멀어지도록(즉, 제 1 면 및 제 3 면(101a,102a)가 상대적으로 가까워지도록) 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하면, 도 7에 도시된 바와 같이, 블록들(210)사이의 간격은 다시 증가될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하면, 앞서 설명된 형상적 구성으로 인해 블록들(210)는 서로 멀어지게 상대적으로 회동하며, 측부들(211c)는 서로 멀어질 수 있다. 또한, 인접한 블록들(210)도 스토퍼(250)로부터 멀어지게 상대적으로 회동하며, 측부들(251c,211c)는 서로 멀어질 수 있다. 특히, 블록들(210)의 곡률반경(R)방향 안쪽(inward)에 배치된 부위, 즉 제 2 부위들(211b)이 서로 멀어지면서 간격을 다시 형성할 수 있다. 또한, 블록들(210)과 스토퍼(250)의 곡률반경(R)방향 안쪽(inward)에 배치된 부위, 즉 제 2 부위들(211b,251b)도 멀어지면서 간격을 다시 형성할 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(102,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 멀어지고(즉, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,101b)이 서로 가까워지고) 서로 동일 평면상에 배치되도록 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하면, 힌지(200), 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)는 확장하도록 구성될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 힌지(200), 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)의 곡률반경방향의 안쪽부위(즉, 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접한 부위)가 확장할 수 있다. 이러한 확장에 의해 변형된 힌지(200) 즉, 블록 어셈블리(201)의 원주방향으로의 길이가 증가될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이러한 증가는 반경방향 안쪽에서의 인장을 허용할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 7에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)(또는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,101b))이 동일평면상에 배치되게 회동시키도록, 즉 이동 단말기(100)을 제 2 상태로 전환시키도록, 힌지(200)는 수평하게 펴질 수 있다. 또한, 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이에 개재되면서 동일하게 하나의 블록(210)으로써 다른 블록(210)과 연동하며, 이에 따라 앞서 설명된 바와 같은 힌지(200)의 변형을 가능하게 할 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에 개재될 때, 제 1 상태로부터 제 2 상태로의 전환을 위해 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 멀어지게(즉, 제 1 면 및 제 3 면(101a,102a)가 상대적으로 가까워지도록) 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하는 것을 허용하도록 구성될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 1 상태에서 다시 제 2 상태로 전환될 수 있다. On the other hand, while the stopper 250 shown in FIG. 8 is interposed and the mobile terminal 100 is folded (in the first state), the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are disposed on the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. ) Is rotated in the first and second directions (R1, R2) away (i.e., the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are relatively close), as shown in FIG. The spacing between 210 can be increased again. In more detail, when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2, the blocks 210 rotate relatively away from each other due to the above-described geometric configuration. And, the side portions 211c may be separated from each other. Further, adjacent blocks 210 are also relatively rotated away from the stopper 250, and the side portions 251c and 211c may be separated from each other. In particular, portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210, that is, the second portions 211b may be separated from each other to form a gap again. In addition, portions disposed inward in the radius of curvature (R) direction of the blocks 210 and the stopper 250, that is, the second portions 211b and 251b may also be separated from each other to form a gap again. Thus, the first and second bodies 102 and 102 are on the same plane with the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b away (i.e., the first and third surfaces 101a and 101b are close to each other). When rotated in the first and second directions R1 and R2 to be disposed, the hinge 200, that is, the block assembly 201 may be configured to expand. In more detail, the hinge 200, that is, the inner portion of the block assembly 201 in the radius of curvature direction (ie, the portion adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b) may be extended. By this expansion, the length in the circumferential direction of the deformed hinge 200, that is, the block assembly 201, can be increased, and thus this increase can allow tension in the radial direction. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 7, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are placed on the same plane with the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b (or the first and third surfaces 101a and 101b). The hinge 200 may be horizontally unfolded to rotate to be disposed, that is, to convert the mobile terminal 100 to the second state. In addition, as described above, the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210 and is identically interlocked with the other block 210 as one block 210, and accordingly, the hinge 200 as described above. ) Can be transformed. Therefore, when the stopper 250 is interposed between the blocks 210, that is, between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b, the second and fourth states are switched from the first state to the second state. The first and second bodies 101 and 102 are moved away from the faces 101b and 102b (that is, the first and third faces 101a and 102a are relatively close), and the first and second bodies 101 and 102 ) Can be configured to allow rotation, and thus can be switched from the first state back to the second state.
또 다른 한편, 도 7에 도시된 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태(제 2 상태)에서, 스토퍼(250)는 홀더(240)의 슬롯(243)을 따라 이동하여 블럭들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)사이에 삽입 또는 개재되지 않을 수 있다. 즉, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210) 또는 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(201:201a,210b)로부터 분리될 수 있다. 이와 같은 분리는 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터의 분리로도 설명될 수 있다. 이러한 분리로 인해, 제 1 및 제 2 제 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)사이의 공간은 비워지며, 이에 따라 이들 어셈블리들(210a,210b)는 홀더(240), 정확하게는 이의 슬롯(242a,242b)을 중심으로 자유롭게 회동할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 9에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)은 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 더 회동할 수 있으며, 이들 어셈블리들(210a,210b)에 연결된 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)도 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 서로 마주하도록 같은 방향들(R1,R2)로 회동할 수 있다. 이러한 회동시, 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)은 도 7에 도시된 바와 같은 증가된 간격을 갖는 확장된 상태를 유지할수 있다. 따라서, 힌지(200)는 홀더(240)을 중심으로, 즉 소정의 축을 중심으로 회동하여, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 마주하게 회동시킬 수 있다. 이러한 힌지(200)의 회동은 스토퍼(250)의 분리로 인해 가능하게 되므로, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210) 또는 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)사이에 개재되지 않을 때, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 서로 가까워지거나 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)이 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)로 이동하는 것을 허용하도록 구성될 있으며, 이에 따라 이동 단말기(100)을 제 2 상태에서 제 3 상태로 전환시킬 수 있다. 또한, 도 9와 같은 제 3 상태에서, 스토퍼(250)의 분리에 의해 형성되는 블록어셈블리(201)내의 간격으로 인해, 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리들(210a,210b)은 반대방향(즉, 제 3 및 제 4 방향들(R3,R4)으로 회동할 수 있다, 동시에, 이들 어셈블리들(210a,210b)에 연결된 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)도 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 멀어지게(즉, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지게) 같은 방향들(R3,R4)로 회동할 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 동일평면상에 배치되게 회동시키도록, 즉 이동 단말기(100)을 제 2 상태로 전환시키도록, 힌지(200)는 회동하여 수평하게 펴질 수 있다. 이와 같이 동일평면상태로 펼쳐진 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이로 스토퍼(250)가 도 7에 도시된 바와 같이, 다시 삽입될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102), 즉 이동 단말기(100)는 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 제 3 상태를 안정적으로 유지할 수 있다. 또한, 앞서 설명된 것과 같은 이유로, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에 개재되지 않을 때, 제 3 상태로부터 제 1 상태로의 전환을 위해, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 멀어지게(즉, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지게) 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하는 것을 허용하도록 구성될 수 있다. On the other hand, in the unfolded state (second state) of the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 7, the stopper 250 moves along the slot 243 of the holder 240 and between the blocks 210, that is, It may not be inserted or interposed between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. That is, the stopper 250 may be separated from the blocks 210 or the first and second block assemblies 201: 201a and 210b. This separation may also be described as separation from the block assembly 201. Due to this separation, the space between the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b is emptied, and accordingly, these assemblies 210a and 210b have a holder 240, specifically their slots 242a and 242b. You can freely rotate around ). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 9, the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b may further rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2, and these assemblies 210a and 210b The first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected to each other may also rotate in the same directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. During such rotation, the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b may maintain an extended state with an increased spacing as shown in FIG. 7. Therefore, the hinge 200 rotates about the holder 240, that is, about a predetermined axis, so that the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. I can. Since the rotation of the hinge 200 becomes possible due to the separation of the stopper 250, the stopper 250 is not interposed between the blocks 210 or the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b. , It is configured to allow the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to move in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are close to or face each other, and thus Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be switched from the second state to the third state. In addition, in the third state as shown in FIG. 9, due to the gap in the block assembly 201 formed by the separation of the stopper 250, the first and second block assemblies 210a and 210b are in opposite directions (that is, It is possible to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4, and at the same time, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 connected to these assemblies 210a and 210b also have the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a. ) Can be rotated in the same directions R3 and R4 away (that is, the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are close). Thus, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are moved to the second And so that the fourth surfaces 101b and 102b rotate so that they are disposed on the same plane, that is, to convert the mobile terminal 100 to the second state, the hinge 200 may be rotated and spread horizontally. The stopper 250 can be reinserted as shown in FIG. 7 between the block assemblies 210a and 210b spread in the same plane state, and accordingly, the first and second bodies 101 and 102, that is, the mobile terminal 100 ) May stably maintain the third state, as described above. In addition, for the same reason as described above, the stopper 250 is between the blocks 210, that is, the first and second block assemblies 210a, 210b) when not interposed, the first and third sides 101a, 102a are moved away (i.e., the second and fourth sides 101b, 102b) for transition from the third state to the first state. It may be configured to allow the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4).
이러한 일련의 작동을 고려할 때, 스토퍼(250)는 블록들(210) 또는 블록 어셈블리(201)에 삽입될 때, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 마주보기 위한 힌지(200)의 회동을 허용하지 않는 반면, 블록들(210) 또는 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터 분리될 때, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 마주보는 것을 허용할 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(250)는 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)을 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동시키는 것을 선택적으로 허용하도록 구성될 수 있다. Considering such a series of operations, when the stopper 250 is inserted into the blocks 210 or the block assembly 201, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are rotated to face the hinge 200. While not allowing, when separated from the blocks 210 or the block assembly 201, the first and third sides 101a and 102a may be allowed to face. Thus, the stopper 250 selectively allows the first and second bodies 101 and 102 to rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other. Can be configured.
앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 블록 어셈블리(201)은 수축 및 압축을 반복하므로, 이러한 수축 및 압축을 위한 블록들(210)의 회동 및 다른 운동을 허용하도록 제 1 및 제 2 링크들(220,230)이 구성될 수 있다. 도 12에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 1 링크(220)에서, 슬롯들(222a,222b)은 서로 반대방향으로 경사질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 슬롯들(222a,222b)은 제 1 또는 제3 면(101a,102a)에 인접한 몸체(221)의 지점들로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)을 향해 연장되면서 안쪽으로 점차적으로 서로 가까워지게 경사질 수 있다. 즉, 슬롯들(222a,222b)의 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)에 인접한 부위에서의 간격이 상기 슬롯들(222a,222b)의 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접한 부위에서의 간격보다 크게 형성될 수 있다. 한편, 도 13에 도시된 바와 같이, 제 2 링크(230)에서, 제 1 링크(220)와 유사하게, 슬롯들(232a,232b)은 서로 반대방향으로 경사질 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 슬롯들(232a,232b)은 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)에 인접한 몸체(231)의 지점들로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)을 향해 연장되면서 안쪽으로 점차적으로 서로 가까워지게 경사질 수 있다. 즉, 슬롯들(232a,232b)의 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)에 인접한 부위에서의 간격이 상기 슬롯들(232a,232b)의 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접한 부위에서의 간격보다 크게 형성될 수 있다.As described above, since the block assembly 201 repeats contraction and compression, the first and second links 220 and 230 are configured to allow rotation and other movement of the blocks 210 for such contraction and compression. Can be. As shown in FIG. 12, in the first link 220, the slots 222a and 222b may be inclined in opposite directions. More specifically, the slots 222a and 222b extend from the points of the body 221 adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b and It can be inclined gradually closer to each other. That is, the spacing at the portion adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a of the slots 222a and 222b is adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the slots 222a and 222b. It may be formed larger than the spacing at the site. Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 13, in the second link 230, similar to the first link 220, the slots 232a and 232b may be inclined in opposite directions. More specifically, the slots 232a and 232b extend from the points of the body 231 adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b, It can be inclined gradually closer to each other. That is, the spacing at a portion adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a of the slots 232a and 232b is adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the slots 232a and 232b. It may be formed larger than the spacing at the site.
도 14를 참조하면, 앞서 설명된 링크들(220,230)과 마찬가지로, 블록 어셈블리(201)의 반복적인 수축 및 압축을 허용하기 위해, 슬롯들(242a,242b)도 제 1 또는 제3 면(101a,102a)에 인접한 몸체(410)의 지점들로부터 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)을 향해 연장되면서 안쪽으로 점차적으로 서로 가까워지게 경사질 수 있다. 즉, 슬롯들(242a,242b)의 제 1 또는 제 3 면(101a,102a)에 인접한 부위에서의 간격이 상기 슬롯들(242a,242b)의 제 2 또는 제 4 면(101b,102b)에 인접한 부위에서의 간격보다 크게 형성될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 14, as with the links 220 and 230 described above, in order to allow repetitive contraction and compression of the block assembly 201, the slots 242a and 242b may also be formed on the first or third surfaces 101a, While extending from the points of the body 410 adjacent to 102a) toward the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b, they may be inclined to gradually approach each other inward. That is, the spacing at a portion adjacent to the first or third surfaces 101a and 102a of the slots 242a and 242b is adjacent to the second or fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the slots 242a and 242b. It may be formed larger than the spacing at the site.
한편, 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 스토퍼(250)는 선택적으로 블록 어셈블리(201)에 개재되도록 이동하며, 이에 따라 허용되는 몸체(101,102)의 회동에 의해 의도되는 이동 단말기(100)의 상태가 달성될 수 있다. 따라서, 이러한 몸체(101,102)의 회동과 스토퍼(250)의 이동을 연계시킴으로써 스토퍼(250)는 이 동단말기(101)의 의도된 상태(즉, 이를 위한 몸체(101,102)의 회동)를 가능하게 하는 정확한 위치에 이동될 수 있다. 이러한 이유로, 힌지(200)는 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2) 또는 제 3 및 제 4 방향들(R3,R4)로의 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)의 회동들과 스토퍼(250)의 이동을 연동시키도록 구성되는 연동 메커니즘(interlock mechanism)(300)을 포함할 수 있다. 즉, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)이 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2) 및 제 3 및 제 4 방향들(R3,R4)중 어느 한 쌍의 방향들로 회동할 때, 그와 같은 몸체들(101,102)의 회동을 허용하는 위치, 정확하게는, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)의 마주함 또는 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)의 마주함을 허용하는 위치로 스토퍼(250)를 이동시키도록 구성될 수 있다. On the other hand, as described above, the stopper 250 selectively moves to be interposed in the block assembly 201, and accordingly, the intended state of the mobile terminal 100 can be achieved by the allowed rotation of the bodies 101 and 102. I can. Therefore, by linking the rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 and the movement of the stopper 250, the stopper 250 enables the intended state of the moving terminal 101 (that is, the rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 for this). It can be moved to the correct position. For this reason, the hinge 200 includes rotations of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in the first and second directions R1 and R2 or in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 and the stopper 250 ) May include an interlock mechanism 300 configured to interlock the movement. That is, the interlocking mechanism 300 includes the first and second bodies 101 and 102 in any one of the first and second directions R1 and R2 and the third and fourth directions R3 and R4. When rotated to, such a position allowing rotation of the bodies 101, 102, precisely, facing the first and third sides 101a, 102a or of the second and fourth sides 101b, 102b It may be configured to move the stopper 250 to a position allowing facing.
도 16은 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 측면도이며, 도 17은 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 측면도이며, 도 18은 반대쪽으로 접힌 상태의 이동 단말기에 포함된 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 측면도이다. 도 19는 펼쳐진 상태의 이동 단말기의 힌지 및 연동 메커니즘을 보여주는 배면도이다. 또한, 도 20은 연동 메커니즘과 힌지를 상세하게 보여주는 사시도이며, 도 21 및 도 22는 변형된 블록 및 스토퍼를 각각 보여주는 측면도들이다. 이들 도면들중, 도 16-도 18는 연동 메커니즘(300)이 적용된 이동 단말기(100)의 제 2 상태, 제 1 상태 및 제 3 상태를 각각 보여준다. 또한, 도 16-도 18은 정확하게는 제 2, 제 1 및 제 3 상태들의 이동 단말기(100)의 하면들을 각각 보여준다. 또한, 도 19은 펼쳐진 이동 단말기(100)의 제 2 및 제 4 면(101b,102b)방향(즉, 도 4의 배향에 있어서 배면방향)에서 본 힌지(200) 및 연동 메커니즘(300)을 도시한다. FIG. 16 is a side view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in an unfolded state, FIG. 17 is a side view showing the hinge and an interlocking mechanism included in the mobile terminal in a folded state, and FIG. 18 is a mobile terminal in a reverse-folded state It is a side view showing the hinge and interlocking mechanism included in the. 19 is a rear view showing a hinge and an interlocking mechanism of the mobile terminal in an unfolded state. In addition, FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing in detail the linkage mechanism and the hinge, and FIGS. 21 and 22 are side views each showing a modified block and a stopper. Among these drawings, FIGS. 16 to 18 show a second state, a first state, and a third state of the mobile terminal 100 to which the interlocking mechanism 300 is applied, respectively. In addition, FIGS. 16 to 18 accurately show the lower surfaces of the mobile terminal 100 in the second, first and third states, respectively. In addition, FIG. 19 shows the hinge 200 and the linkage mechanism 300 viewed from the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b of the unfolded mobile terminal 100 (ie, the rear direction in the orientation of FIG. 4 ). do.
이러한 연동 메커니즘(300)은 기본적으로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)와 스토퍼(250)의 연동을 위해, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)와 결합되며, 동시에 스토퍼(250)와 결합될 수 있다. 이러한 결합을 위해 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 측부들(101c,102c)의 임의의 위치들에 연결될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 힌지(200)가 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)에 인접하거나 이들을 연결하도록 구성되므로, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)에 인접하거나 이들을 연결하도록 측부들(101c,102c)와 결합될 수 있다. 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)은 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a.102a)과 소정간격으로 이격되므로, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 힌지(200)와 이격될 수 있으며, 이들(200,300)은 서로 간섭하지 않을 수 있다. This interlocking mechanism 300 is basically coupled to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 for interlocking the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and the stopper 250, and at the same time to be coupled with the stopper 250. I can. For this coupling, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be connected to any positions of the sides 101c and 102c of the first and second bodies 101 and 102. For example, since the hinge 200 is configured to abut or connect the first and third faces 101a, 102a, the interlocking mechanism 300 is adjacent to or connects the second and fourth faces 101b, 102b. It may be combined with the sides 101c and 102c to connect. Since the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are spaced apart from the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a by a predetermined distance, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be spaced apart from the hinge 200, and these (200,300) May not interfere with each other.
이와 같은 연동 메커니즘(300)은 몸체(101,102)와 스토퍼(250)을 효과적으로 연동시키기 위해 여러가지 메커니즘으로 이루어질 수 있으며, 예를 들어, 도시된 바와 같이, 몸체(101,102)와 스토퍼(250)를 구조적으로 연결하여 몸체(101,102)의 회전력을 스토퍼(250)에 전달하도록 구성되는 기어 트레인(gear train)으로 이루어질 수 있다. 이러한 기어 트레인은 또한 스토퍼(250)에 요구되는 선택적인 블록 어셈블리(201)로의 삽입을 위해 스토퍼(250)를 몸체(101,102)사이에서 직선왕복운동시키도록 구성될 수 있다. Such interlocking mechanism 300 may be made of various mechanisms to effectively interlock the bodies 101 and 102 and the stopper 250, for example, as shown, structurally the body 101 and 102 It may be made of a gear train (gear train) configured to transmit the rotational force of the body (101, 102) to the stopper (250). This gear train can also be configured to linearly reciprocate the stopper 250 between the bodies 101 and 102 for insertion into the optional block assembly 201 required for the stopper 250.
이와 같은 기어 트레인으로서의 연동 메커니즘(300)은 도 16-도 18에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 먼저 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)에 제공되거나 연결되는 한 쌍의 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)을 포함할 수 있다. 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)사이에서 서로 마주하도록 배치되며, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)과 연동(interlock)되도록 구성될 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)는 상기 몸체들(101,102)이 회동할 때 함께 회동하도록 구성될 수 있다. The interlocking mechanism 300 as such a gear train is a pair of first gears 310a and 310b provided or connected to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 first, as well illustrated in FIGS. 16-18. It may include. The first gears 310a and 310b are disposed to face each other between the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and may be configured to interlock with the first and second bodies 101 and 102. Accordingly, the first gears 310a and 310b may be configured to rotate together when the bodies 101 and 102 rotate.
또한, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)과 각각 맞물리는(engage with) 한 쌍의 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)를 포함할 수 있다. 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)도 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)와 유사하게 서로 마주하게 배치될 수 있다. 이러한 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 이동 단말기(100) 또는 몸체들(101,102)의 측방향으로 제 1 기어들(310a,310b) 안쪽(inward)에 배치될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 이러한 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 서로 맞물릴 수 있다. 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)의 상호 맞물림에 의해 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)는 서로 연결되며, 연동 메커니즘(300)에 의해 이들의 몸체(101,102)의 회전도 상호 연동될 수 있다. 따라서, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 동시에 같은 각도만큼 회동시킬 수 있다. In addition, the interlocking mechanism 300 may include a pair of second gears 320a and 320b that engage with the first gears 310a and 310b, respectively. The second gears 320a and 320b may also be disposed to face each other, similar to the first gears 310a and 310b. These second gears (320a, 320b) may be disposed inward (inward) the first gears (310a, 310b) in the lateral direction of the mobile terminal (100) or the bodies (101, 102), and accordingly, such a second The gears 320a and 320b may mesh with each other. The first and second bodies 101 and 102 are connected to each other by mutual engagement of the second gears 320a and 320b, and rotation of the bodies 101 and 102 may be interlocked by the interlocking mechanism 300. Accordingly, the interlocking mechanism 300 can rotate the first and second bodies 101 and 102 simultaneously by the same angle.
또한, 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 스토퍼(250)의 이동을 위해 상기 스토퍼(250)와도 맞물릴 수 있다. 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)가 서로 대향되게 마주하므로, 이러한 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 스토퍼(250)의 서로 다른 부위들, 예를 들어 이의 양측부들에 각각 맞물릴 수 있다. 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 앞서 설명된 바와 같이, 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)뿐만 아니라 스토퍼(250)와도 맞물릴 필요가 있으므로, 이를 위해 복합기어(compound gear)로서 형성될 수 있다. 보다 상세하게는, 제 2 기어(320a)는 하나의 축에 결합된 구동기어(drive gear)(321a)와 종동기어(driven gear)(322a)를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 다른 하나의 제 2 기어(320b)도 하나의 축에 결합된 구동기어(321b)와 종동기어(driven gear)(322b)를 포함할 수 있다. 따라서, 이러한 제 2 기어(320a,320b)에서, 구동기어(321a,321b)가 제 1 기어들(310a,320b)과 각각 맞물릴 수 있으며, 종동기어(322a,322b)가 스토퍼(250)와 맞물릴 수 있다. 또한, 앞서 언급된 바와 같이, 제 2 기어(320a,320b)의 상호 맞물림을 위해 구동기어들(321a,321b)가 서로 맞물릴 수 있다. 도 19에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 보다 안정적인 스토퍼(250)와의 맞물림 및 구동을 위해, 어느 하나의 제 2 기어(320a)는 한 쌍의 종동기어들(322a)를 포함할 수 있으며, 이들은 구동기어(321a)의 길이방향 또는 축방향 양 끝단들에 각각 배치될 수 있다. 마찬가지로, 다른 하나의 제 2 기어(320b)도 한 쌍의 종동기어들(322b)를 포함할 수 있으며, 이들은 구동기어(321b)의 길이방향 또는 축방향 양 끝단들에 각각 배치될 수 있다. 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 이들의 구동기어(321a,321b)에 의해 서로 직접적으로 맞물리므로, 서로 반대 방향들로 회전할 수 있다. 반면, 제 2 기어(320a)에서, 구동 및 종동기어들(321a,322a)은 동일축에 결합되어 있으므로, 서로 같은 방향으로 회전할 수 있으며, 마찬가지로 다른 하나의 제 2 기어(320b)에서도, 구동 및 종동기어들(321b,322b)은 동일축에 결합되어 있으므로, 서로 같은 방향으로 회전할 수 있다. 따라서, 어느 하나의 제 2 기어(320a)의 구동 및 종동기어들(321a,322a)들은 다른 하나의 제 2 기어(320b)의 구동 및 종동기어들(321b,322b)와 반대되는 방향으로 회전할 수 있다. 앞서 설명된 제 1 및 제 2 기어들(310a,310b,320a,320b)의 축들은 다수개의 링크들(350)에 의해 연결되며, 이에 따라 제 1 및 제 2 기어들(310a,310b,320a,320b)은 서로 결합되어 안정적으로 회전할 수 있다. In addition, the second gears 320a and 320b may also mesh with the stopper 250 to move the stopper 250. Since the second gears 320a and 320b face each other to face each other, the second gears 320a and 320b may be engaged with different portions of the stopper 250, for example, both sides thereof. The second gears 320a and 320b need to be engaged with the stopper 250 as well as the first gears 310a and 310b, as described above, and thus may be formed as a compound gear for this purpose. have. In more detail, the second gear 320a may include a drive gear 321a and a driven gear 322a coupled to one shaft. In addition, the other second gear 320b may also include a drive gear 321b and a driven gear 322b coupled to one shaft. Therefore, in these second gears (320a, 320b), the drive gears (321a, 321b) can be meshed with the first gears (310a, 320b), respectively, the driven gears (322a, 322b) and the stopper 250 Can be interlocked. In addition, as mentioned above, the driving gears 321a and 321b may be meshed with each other in order to mutually mesh the second gears 320a and 320b. As well as shown in Figure 19, for more stable engagement and driving with the stopper 250, any one of the second gear (320a) may include a pair of driven gears (322a), these are the drive gear It may be disposed at both ends of the longitudinal direction or the axial direction of (321a), respectively. Similarly, the other second gear 320b may also include a pair of driven gears 322b, and these may be disposed at both ends of the drive gear 321b in the longitudinal direction or the axial direction, respectively. Since the second gears 320a and 320b are directly meshed with each other by their driving gears 321a and 321b, they can rotate in opposite directions. On the other hand, in the second gear 320a, since the driving and driven gears 321a and 322a are coupled to the same shaft, they can rotate in the same direction, and likewise, the other second gear 320b is also driven. And since the driven gears 321b and 322b are coupled to the same shaft, they can rotate in the same direction. Accordingly, the driving and driven gears 321a and 322a of any one second gear 320a can rotate in a direction opposite to the driving and driven gears 321b and 322b of the other second gear 320b. I can. The axes of the first and second gears 310a, 310b, 320a, and 320b described above are connected by a plurality of links 350, and accordingly, the first and second gears 310a, 310b, 320a, 320b) is coupled to each other and can rotate stably.
또한, 이와 같은 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)에 의해 구동될 수 있도록, 스토퍼(250)는 상기 제 2 기어(320a,320b)들과 맞물리는 랙 기어(254)를 포함할 수 있다. 랙 기어(254)는 다른 도면들 뿐만 아니라 도 20에도 잘 도시되는 바와 같이, 연동 메커니즘(300), 특히 이의 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)와 결합되도록, 스토퍼(250)의 몸체(251)로부터 연동 메커니즘(300)을 향해 길게 연장될 수 있다. 랙 기어(254)는 스토퍼(250) 및 홀더(240)와 마찬가지로 이동 단말기(100)의 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에 배치될 수 있다. 랙 기어(254)는 또한, 블록 어셈블리(201)로의 스토퍼(250)의 선택적인 삽입을 위한 이동을 위해, 홀더(240)의 슬롯(243)과 정렬될 수 있다. 즉, 랙 기어(254)는 이동 단말기(100) 또는 이의 몸체들(101,102)의 회동축 방향에 있어서 슬롯(243)과 나란하게 배치되며, 블록 어셈블리(201)에 수직한 방향으로 슬롯(243)과 함께 연장될 수 있다. 이러한 랙 기어(254)는 스토퍼(250) 및 홀더(240)와 대체적으로 동일한 배향을 가지므로, 랙 기어(254)의 추가적인 배향 및 배치와 관련해서 앞서 설명된 스토퍼(250) 및 홀더(240)의 배향 및 배치가 참조되며 추가적인 설명은 생략된다. In addition, to be driven by the second gears 320a and 320b, the stopper 250 may include a rack gear 254 meshing with the second gears 320a and 320b. The rack gear 254 is the body 251 of the stopper 250 so as to be engaged with the interlocking mechanism 300, in particular its second gears 320a, 320b, as well as shown in FIG. 20 as well as other drawings. It may be elongated toward the interlocking mechanism 300 from. Like the stopper 250 and the holder 240, the rack gear 254 may be disposed between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 of the mobile terminal 100. The rack gear 254 may also be aligned with the slot 243 of the holder 240 for movement for selective insertion of the stopper 250 into the block assembly 201. That is, the rack gear 254 is disposed in parallel with the slot 243 in the rotation axis direction of the mobile terminal 100 or its bodies 101 and 102, and the slot 243 is disposed in a direction perpendicular to the block assembly 201. Can be extended with Since this rack gear 254 has substantially the same orientation as the stopper 250 and the holder 240, the stopper 250 and holder 240 described above with respect to the additional orientation and arrangement of the rack gear 254 The orientation and arrangement of are referenced, and further description is omitted.
보다 상세하게는, 앞서 설명된 제 2 기어들(320a,320b) 둘 다와 맞물리기 위해, 랙 기어(254)는 서로 대향되는 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)사이에 배치될 수 있으며, 대체적으로 평평한 플레이트 또는 스트립 몸체를 가질 수 있다. 정확하게는 랙 기어(254)는 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)의 종동기어들(322a,322b)사이에 배치될 수 있다. 또한, 랙 기어(254), 즉 이의 몸체의 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)와 마주하는 부위들 또는 표면들에는 톱니들(teeth)이 형성될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 랙 기어(254)는 이러한 제 2 기어들(320a,320b), 정확하게는 이의 종동기어들(322a,322b) 둘 다와 맞물리도록 구성될 수 있다. 이와 같은 랙 기어(254)는 제 2 기어(320a,320b)의 회전운동을 직선운동으로 전환시킬 수 있다. 또한, 랙 기어(254)는 제 2 기어(320a,320b)의 회전 방향에 따라 서로 다른 방향들, 즉 블록 어셈블리(201)를 향한 방향 및/또는 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터 멀어지는 방향으로 왕복 운동할 수 있다. 따라서, 랙 기어(254)의 이와 같은 운동에 의해 서포터(250)는 블록 어셈블리(201)에 선택적으로 삽입될 수 있다. 즉, 서포터(250)는 블록 어셈블리(201)에 삽입되거나 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터 분리 또는 인출될 수 있다. 또한, 앞서 설명된 제 2 기어(230a)의 한 쌍의 종동기어들(232a) 및 다른 하나의 제 2 기어(230b)의 한 쌍의 종동기어들(232a) 둘 다와 맞물리도록, 도 19, 도 20, 도 22에 도시된 바와 같이, 스토퍼(250)는 한 쌍의 랙 기어(254)를 포함할 수 있다. 이러한 한 쌍의 랙 기어(254)는 종동기어들(232a,232b)의 위치와 일치되게, 스토퍼(250)의 길이방향으로 소정간격으로 이격될 수 있다. More specifically, in order to mesh with both of the second gears 320a and 320b described above, the rack gear 254 may be disposed between the second gears 320a and 320b facing each other, and may be It can have a flat plate or strip body. To be precise, the rack gear 254 may be disposed between the driven gears 322a and 322b of the second gears 320a and 320b. In addition, the rack gear 254, that is, portions or surfaces facing the second gears 320a and 320b of the body thereof may have teeth formed, and accordingly, the rack gear 254 It can be configured to mesh with both the second gears 320a and 320b, precisely their driven gears 322a and 322b. Such a rack gear 254 may convert the rotational motion of the second gears 320a and 320b into linear motion. In addition, the rack gear 254 may reciprocate in different directions according to the rotation direction of the second gears 320a and 320b, that is, in a direction toward the block assembly 201 and/or in a direction away from the block assembly 201. I can. Accordingly, the supporter 250 may be selectively inserted into the block assembly 201 by such movement of the rack gear 254. That is, the supporter 250 may be inserted into the block assembly 201 or separated or removed from the block assembly 201. In addition, so as to mesh with both of the pair of driven gears 232a of the second gear 230a described above and the pair of driven gears 232a of the other second gear 230b, FIG. 19, As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, the stopper 250 may include a pair of rack gears 254. The pair of rack gears 254 may be spaced apart at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction of the stopper 250 to match the positions of the driven gears 232a and 232b.
한편, 제 1 기어(310a,310b)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)와 함께 회동하도록 다양한 방식에 의해 이들 몸체들(101,102)와 연동 또는 연결될 수 있다. 일 예로서, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 기어(310a,310b)와 몸체들(101,102)을 연결하도록 구성되는 레버들(330a,330b)을 포함할 수 있다. 먼저 레버(330a)는 제 1 몸체(101) 및 제 1 기어(310a)사이에 연장되며, 이들과 결합될 수 있다. 즉, 레버(330a)는 제 1 기어(310a)와 연결되는 제 1 끝단 및 제 1 몸체(101)와 연결되는 제 2 끝단을 포함할 수 있다. 제 1 기어(310a)는 별도로 형성되어 레버(330a)의 제 1 끝단에 결합될 수 있으며, 도시된 바와 같이, 레버(330a)의 제 1 끝단에 일체로 형성될 수 있다. 제 1 기어(310a)의 축은 이러한 레버(330a)의 제 1 끝단에 제공될 수 있다. 유사하게, 다른 하나의 레버(330b)는 제 2 몸체(102) 및 제 1 기어(310b)사이에 연장되며, 이들과 결합될 수 있다. 즉, 레버(330b)는 제 1 기어(310b)와 연결되는 제 1 끝단 및 제 2 몸체(102)와 연결되는 제 2 끝단을 포함할 수 있다. 제 1 기어(310b)는 별도로 형성되어 레버(330b)의 제 1 끝단에 결합될 수 있으며, 도시된 바와 같이, 레버(330b)의 제 1 끝단에 일체로 형성될 수 있다. 제 1 기어(310b)의 축은 이러한 레버(330b)의 제 1 끝단에 제공될 수 있다. 이와 같은 레버들(lever)(330a,330b)은 통상적인 레버와 마찬가지로 지지점을 중심으로 이의 양끝단에서 서로 반대되는 회전을 발생시킬 수 있다. 예를 들어, 이러한 지지점은 이들(330a,330b)에 제공된 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)의 회전축들이 될 수 있다. 따라서, 레버(330a)의 제 1 끝단, 즉 제 1 기어(310a)는 제 2 기어(320a)에 상대적으로 레버(330a)의 제 2 끝단, 즉 제 1 몸체(101)와 반대되게 회전할 수 있다. 마찬가지로, 레버(330b)의 제 1 끝단, 즉 다른 하나의 제 1 기어(310b)도 제 2 기어(320b)에 상대적으로 레버(330b)의 제 2 끝단, 즉 제 2 몸체(102)와 반대되게 회전할 수 있다. 이러한 레버(330a,330b)이외에도, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 기어(310a,310b)를 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)와 반대되는 방향으로 회전시키는 다른 메커니즘을 사용할 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 기어(320a:321a,322a)는 이에 맞물린 제 1 기어(310a)와 반대방향으로 회전하므로, 제 2 기어(320a)는 실제적으로 제 1 몸체(101)와 동일한 방향으로 회전할 수 있다. 마찬가지로, 다른 하나의 제 2 기어(320b:321b,322b)도 이에 맞물린 제 1 기어(310b)와 반대방향으로 회전하므로, 제 2 기어(320b)는 실제적으로 제 2 몸체(102)와 동일한 방향으로 회전할 수 있다. Meanwhile, the first gears 310a and 310b may be interlocked or connected with the bodies 101 and 102 by various methods so as to rotate together with the first and second bodies 101 and 102. As an example, the interlocking mechanism 300 may include levers 330a and 330b configured to connect the first gears 310a and 310b and the bodies 101 and 102. First, the lever 330a extends between the first body 101 and the first gear 310a, and may be coupled with them. That is, the lever 330a may include a first end connected to the first gear 310a and a second end connected to the first body 101. The first gear 310a may be formed separately and coupled to the first end of the lever 330a, and may be integrally formed with the first end of the lever 330a, as shown. The shaft of the first gear 310a may be provided at the first end of the lever 330a. Similarly, the other lever 330b extends between the second body 102 and the first gear 310b, and may be coupled thereto. That is, the lever 330b may include a first end connected to the first gear 310b and a second end connected to the second body 102. The first gear 310b may be formed separately and coupled to the first end of the lever 330b, and may be integrally formed with the first end of the lever 330b, as shown. The shaft of the first gear 310b may be provided at the first end of the lever 330b. Like a conventional lever, the levers 330a and 330b may rotate opposite to each other at both ends of the support point. For example, these support points may be rotational axes of the first gears 310a and 310b provided to them 330a and 330b. Therefore, the first end of the lever 330a, that is, the first gear 310a, can rotate relative to the second gear 320a, and opposite to the second end of the lever 330a, that is, the first body 101. have. Similarly, the first end of the lever 330b, that is, the other first gear 310b, is also opposite to the second end of the lever 330b, that is, the second body 102 relative to the second gear 320b. Can rotate. In addition to the levers 330a and 330b, the interlocking mechanism 300 may use another mechanism for rotating the first gears 310a and 310b in directions opposite to the first and second bodies 101 and 102. In addition, since the second gear (320a: 321a, 322a) rotates in the opposite direction to the first gear (310a) meshed therewith, the second gear (320a) can actually rotate in the same direction as the first body (101). have. Similarly, the other second gear (320b: 321b, 322b) rotates in the opposite direction to the first gear (310b) meshed therewith, so the second gear (320b) is actually in the same direction as the second body (102). Can rotate.
한편, 도 18 및 도 19에 도시된 바와 같이, 일 예로서, 연동 메커니즘(300)도 의도된 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)를 마주하게 하는 제 1 상태 및 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)를 마주하게 하는 제 2 상태를 위해, 소정 곡률을 형성하면서 변형될 필요가 있다. 그러나, 도 8 및 도 17을 참조하면, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 힌지(200)에 대해 곡률반경(R) 방향으로 안쪽에 배치되므로, 상대적으로 제 1 힌지(200)보다 짧은 곡률반경을 가질 수 있다. 따라서, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 힌지(200)보다 더 큰 곡률로 변형되며 동시에 상대적으로 압축을 받게 된다. 만일 연동 메커니즘(300)이 측부(101c,102c)사이에서 고정된 길이를 가지면, 이러한 전체적인 압축에 의해 뒤틀릴 수 있으며, 의도된 작동을 달성할 수 없다. 또한, 뒤틀린 연동 메커니즘(300)는 인접한 힌지(200)와 간섭하거나 파손될 수 있다. 적어도 이러한 이유로, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)에 슬라이드 가능하게 연결 또는 결합되도록 구성될 수 있다. Meanwhile, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, as an example, the interlocking mechanism 300 also faces the intended first and third surfaces 101a and 102a and the second and fourth surfaces For the second state to face (101b, 102b), it needs to be deformed while forming a predetermined curvature. However, referring to FIGS. 8 and 17, since the interlocking mechanism 300 is disposed inside the hinge 200 in the direction of the radius of curvature R, it may have a relatively shorter radius of curvature than the first hinge 200. have. Therefore, the interlocking mechanism 300 is deformed to a greater curvature than the hinge 200 and at the same time is relatively compressed. If the interlocking mechanism 300 has a fixed length between the sides 101c and 102c, it may be distorted by this overall compression, and the intended operation cannot be achieved. In addition, the twisted interlocking mechanism 300 may interfere with or break the adjacent hinge 200. For at least this reason, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be configured to be slidably connected or coupled to the first and second bodies 101 and 102.
보다 상세하게는, 도 16-도 19를 참조하면, 레버(330a,330b)의 제 1 끝단들은 이에 제공된 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)의 회전축을 중심으로 상기 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)에 상대적으로 회동가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 반면, 어느 하나의 레버(330a)의 제 2 끝단은 제 1 몸체(101)에 슬라이드 가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 정확하게는 레버(330a)의 제 2 끝단은 제 1 몸체들(101)에 상기 제 1 몸체(101)의 측방향(lateral direction)으로 슬라이드 가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 마찬가지로, 다른 하나의 레버(330b)의 제 2 끝단은 제 2 몸체(102)에 슬라이드 가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 정확하게는 레버(330b)의 제 2 끝단은 제 2 몸체(102)에 상기 제 2 몸체(102)의 측방향으로 슬라이드 가능하게 결합될 수 있다. 이러한 결합을 위해, 연동 메커니즘은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101)에 각각 제공되며 그 내부에 레버(330a,330b), 즉 이의 제 2 끝단들을 각각 슬라이드 가능하게 수용하는 브라켓(bracket)(340a,340b)를 포함할 수 있다. 브라켓(340a,340b)은 연동 메커니즘(300)의 다른 부품들과 마찬가지로 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)에 인접하게 배치될 수 있다. 또한, 브라켓(340a,340b)은 레버(330a,330b), 즉 이의 제 2 끝단들을 수용하며, 이동 가능하게 안내하는 슬롯들(341a,341b)을 포함할 수 있다. 따라서, 이와 같은 레버들(330a,330b) 및 브라켓(340a,340b)에 의해 연동 메커니즘(300)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)에 회동 가능하면서도 슬라이드 가능하게 연결될 수 있다. More specifically, referring to FIGS. 16-19, the first ends of the levers 330a and 330b are the first gears 310a and 310b around the rotational axis of the first gears 310a and 310b provided thereto. ) Can be relatively rotatable. On the other hand, the second end of any one lever 330a may be slidably coupled to the first body 101. Specifically, the second end of the lever 330a may be slidably coupled to the first bodies 101 in a lateral direction of the first body 101. Likewise, the second end of the other lever 330b may be slidably coupled to the second body 102. To be precise, the second end of the lever 330b may be slidably coupled to the second body 102 in the lateral direction of the second body 102. For this coupling, an interlocking mechanism is provided on the first and second bodies 101, respectively, and therein, levers 330a and 330b, that is, a bracket 340a for slidably receiving the second ends thereof, respectively. ,340b). The brackets 340a and 340b may be disposed adjacent to the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b like other parts of the interlocking mechanism 300. In addition, the brackets 340a and 340b may include levers 330a and 330b, that is, slots 341a and 341b for receiving the second ends thereof and guiding them to be movable. Accordingly, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be rotatably connected to the first and second bodies 101 and 102 while being slidably connected by the levers 330a and 330b and the brackets 340a and 340b.
도 16에 도시된 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태(즉, 제 2 상태)에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지도록 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하면, 도 17에 도시된 바와 같이, 연동 메커니즘(200)의 양측부들, 즉 레버들(330a,330b)은 브라켓(340a,340b)에 의해 안내되면서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)을 향해 이동하며, 이들 몸체들(101,102)내에 삽입될 수 있다. 이러한 레버들(330a,330b)의 이동에 의해 연동 메커니즘(300)는 전체적으로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에서 축소된 길이를 가질 수 있으며 이에 따라 뒤틀림없이 가해지는 전체적인 압축을 흡수할 수 있다. 다른 한편, 도 17에 도시된 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 마주하게 이동 단말기(100)가 접혀진 상태(즉, 제 1 상태)에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 멀어지도록 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하면, 도 16에 도시된 바와 같이, 연동 메커니즘(200)의 양측부들, 즉 레버들(330a,330b)은 브라겟(340a,340b)에 의해 안내되면서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)로부터 멀어지게 이동하며 이들 몸체들(101,102)로부터 인출될 수 있다. 이러한 레버들(330a,330b)의 이동에 의해 연동 메커니즘(300)은 전체적으로 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에서 다시 확장된 길이로 복귀할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 상대적으로 가해지는 인장을 허용할 수 있다. 또 다른 한편, 도 16의 제 2 상태에서, 이동 단말기(100)가 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)가 마주하도록 도 18에 도시된 제 3 상태로 전환되면, 앞서 설명된 도 17의 제 1 상태와는 반대로 연동 메커니즘(300)이 힌지(200)에 상대적으로 인장을 더 받게 될 수 있다. 따라서, 도 16의 제 2 상태에서 도 18의 제 3 상태로 전환되는 동안, 플랜지들(330a,330b)은 브라겟(340a,340b)에 의해 안내되면서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)로부터 멀어지게 더 이동하며 이들 몸체들(101,102)로부터 추가적으로 인출될 수 있다. 반대로, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 18의 제 3 상태로부터 도 16의 제1 상태로 전환될 때, 또는 이러한 전환동안, 레버들(330a,330b)은 브라켓(340a,340b)에 의해 안내되면서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)을 향해 이동하며, 이들 몸체들(101,102)내에 삽입될 수 있다. 이와 같은 슬라이드 가능한 레버들(330a,330b)에 의해, 연동 메커니즘(300)는 측부(101c,102c)사이에서 가변되는 길이를 가질 수 있다. 따라서, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 뒤틀림이나 파손없이 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회동을 허용하는 의도된 변형을 달성할 수 있다. In the unfolded state of the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 16 (that is, the second state), the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are connected to the third and third surfaces so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b become close. When rotated in the four directions (R3, R4), as shown in Fig. 17, both sides of the interlocking mechanism 200, that is, the levers (330a, 330b) are guided by the brackets (340a, 340b), the first And moving toward the second bodies 101 and 102, and may be inserted into these bodies 101 and 102. By the movement of the levers 330a and 330b, the interlocking mechanism 300 may have a reduced length between the first and second bodies 101 and 102 as a whole, and thus absorb the overall compression applied without distortion. . On the other hand, in a state in which the mobile terminal 100 is folded (ie, in the first state) so that the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b shown in FIG. 17 face each other, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are When the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b are rotated in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that they are away from each other, as shown in FIG. 16, both sides of the interlocking mechanism 200, that is, the levers 330a , 330b) is guided by the brackets 340a and 340b and moves away from the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and may be withdrawn from these bodies 101 and 102. By the movement of these levers (330a, 330b), the interlocking mechanism (300) as a whole can return back to the extended length between the first and second bodies (101, 102), thereby allowing a relatively applied tension. I can. On the other hand, in the second state of FIG. 16, when the mobile terminal 100 is switched to the third state shown in FIG. 18 so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other, the previously described FIG. 17 Contrary to the first state, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be further subjected to tension relative to the hinge 200. Therefore, during the transition from the second state of FIG. 16 to the third state of FIG. 18, the flanges 330a and 330b are guided by the brackets 340a and 340b, and the first and second bodies 101 and 102 It moves further away from and can be additionally withdrawn from these bodies 101 and 102. Conversely, when the mobile terminal 100 is switched from the third state of FIG. 18 to the first state of FIG. 16, or during this transition, the levers 330a and 330b are guided by the brackets 340a and 340b, It moves toward the first and second bodies 101 and 102 and can be inserted into these bodies 101 and 102. By such slidable levers 330a and 330b, the interlocking mechanism 300 may have a variable length between the sides 101c and 102c. Thus, the interlocking mechanism 300 can achieve an intended deformation allowing rotation of the first and second bodies 101 and 102 without distortion or breakage.
또한, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)사이에 배치되는 부품들(310-350)을 가지며, 이러한 부품들(310-350)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회동에 의해 함께 회동하면서 힌지(200)와 간섭할 수 있다. 이러한 이유로, 힌지(200)의 블록(210)은 연동 메커니즘(300)를 마주하는 몸체(211)의 일부에 형성되며, 상기 몸체(211)의 안쪽 방향(inwardly)으로 연장되는 리세스(213)를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 같은 이유로, 스토퍼(250)도 연동 메커니즘(300)를 마주하는 몸체(251)의 일부에 형성되며, 상기 몸체(251)의 안쪽방향으로 연장되는 리세스(255)를 포함할 수 있다. 리세스(255)가 연동 메커니즘(300)에 대응되게 배치되므로, 이러한 연동 메커니즘(300)과 맞물리는 랙 기어(254)도 상기 리세스(255)내에 배치될 수 있다. 도 19에 잘 도시된 바와 같이, 이와 같은 리세스(213,255)는 블록 어셈블리(201)에서 서로 연결되어 연동 메커니즘(300)을 따라 형성되는 하나의 큰 리세스를 형성할 수 있다. 따라서, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 작동도중 리세스(213,255)에 의해 수용될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 힌지(200)와 간섭하지 않을 수 있다. In addition, the interlocking mechanism 300 has parts 310-350 disposed between the first and second bodies 101, 102, and these parts 310-350 are of the first and second bodies 101, 102. It can interfere with the hinge 200 while rotating together by the rotation. For this reason, the block 210 of the hinge 200 is formed in a part of the body 211 facing the interlocking mechanism 300, and a recess 213 extending inwardly of the body 211 It may include. In addition, for the same reason, the stopper 250 is also formed on a part of the body 251 facing the interlocking mechanism 300 and may include a recess 255 extending in the inner direction of the body 251. Since the recess 255 is disposed to correspond to the interlocking mechanism 300, a rack gear 254 meshed with the interlocking mechanism 300 may also be disposed in the recess 255. As illustrated in FIG. 19, the recesses 213 and 255 may be connected to each other in the block assembly 201 to form one large recess formed along the interlocking mechanism 300. Accordingly, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be accommodated by the recesses 213 and 255 during operation, and thus may not interfere with the hinge 200.
앞서 설명된 구성을 고려할 때, 연동 메커니즘은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들(101,102)중 어느 하나와 연동하는 부품들만으로도 스토퍼(250)를 의도된 바와 같이, 작동시킬 수 있다. 예를 들어, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)중 어느 하나와 연결되는 제 1 기어(310) 및 이와 같은 제 1 기어(310)와 스토퍼(250)에 각각 맞물리는 제 2 기어(320)을 포함할 수 있다. 같은 이유로, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 앞서 언급된 제 1 기어(310)와 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 연결하는 레버(330) 및 레버(330)를 수용하도록 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체(101,102)에 제공되는 브라켓(340)을 포함할 수 있다. In consideration of the configuration described above, the interlocking mechanism may operate the stopper 250 as intended, only with parts interlocking with any one of the first and second bodies 101 and 102. For example, the interlocking mechanism 300 is a first gear 310 connected to any one of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, and the first gear 310 and the stopper 250 respectively meshing It may include 2 gears (320). For the same reason, the interlocking mechanism 300 is a first or second body to receive the lever 330 and the lever 330 connecting the first gear 310 and the first or second body 101, 102 mentioned above. It may include a bracket 340 provided on 101 and 102.
이와 같은 연동 메커니즘(300)의 전체적인 구성하에서, 도 16에 도시된 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태(제 2 상태)에서, 중앙부의 블록들(210)사이, 즉 제 1 및 제 2 블록 어셈블리(210a,210b)사이에는 충분한 간격이 형성될 수 있다. 이러한 제 2 상태에서, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 앞서 언급된 이의 부품들과 랙 기어(254)의 연동에 의해 스토퍼(250)을 형성된 블록 어셈블리(201)사이의 간격내에 배치시키도록 구성될 수 있다. 즉, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 3 상태에서 스토퍼(250)를 블록 어셈블리(201)에 삽입되게 이동시킬 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 상태에서의 스토퍼(250) 및 이에 연계된 힌지(200)의 작동은 도 7에서 설명된 것이 참조되며, 추가적인 설명은 생략된다. Under the overall configuration of the interlocking mechanism 300, in the unfolded state (second state) of the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 16, between the central blocks 210, that is, the first and second block assemblies ( A sufficient gap may be formed between 210a and 210b). In this second state, the interlocking mechanism 300 may be configured to place the stopper 250 within the gap between the formed block assembly 201 by interlocking the aforementioned parts thereof and the rack gear 254. . That is, the interlocking mechanism 300 may move the stopper 250 to be inserted into the block assembly 201 in the third state. The operation of the stopper 250 and the hinge 200 connected thereto in the second state as described above is referred to as described in FIG. 7, and further description is omitted.
한편, 도 16에 도시된 스토퍼(250)가 블록 어셈블리(201)사이에 개재되고 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태(제 2 상태)에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지도록 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하기 시작할 수 있다. 이와 같은 회동의 시작 또는 회동의 수행중(즉, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 16의 제 2 상태에서 제 1 상태로 전환되는중), 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회전방향(R3,R4)과는 반대되는 방향들(T1,T2)로 각각 회전할 수 있으며, 다시 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 몸체들(101,102)의 회전방향(R3,R4)와 같은 방향들(T3,T4)로 회전할 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)의 회전에 의해 랙 기어(254)는 화살표(A2)방향(즉, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)방향)으로 병진운동(translate)할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 17에 도시된 제 1 상태에서, 스토퍼(254)는 여전히 블록 어셈블리(201)에 삽입된 상태를 유지하면서, 볼록 어셈블리(201)로부터 디스플레이(151)를 향해(즉, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,101b)를 향해) 더 돌출될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 큰 곡률로 변형된 디스플레이(151)를 다른 블록들(210)과 함께 지지할 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 상태에서의 스토퍼(250) 및 이에 연계된 힌지(200)의 작동은 도 8에서 설명된 것이 참조되며, 추가적인 설명은 생략된다. 또한, 도 17에 도시된 제 1 상태에서, 이동 단말기(100)의 제 1 상태에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 반대방향인 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하기 시작할 수 있다. 도 17에 도시된 바와 같이, 이와 같은 회동의 시작 또는 회동의 수행중(즉, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 17의 제 1 상태에서 도 16의 제 2 상태로 전환되는중), 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회전방향(R1,R2)과는 반대되는 방향들(T3,T4)로 각각 회전할 수 있으며, 다시 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 몸체들(101,102)의 회전방향(R1,R1)와 같은 방향들(T1,T2)로 회전할 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)의 회전에 의해 랙 기어(254)는 화살표(A1)방향(즉, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)방향)으로 병진운동할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 16에 도시된 제 2 상태로 이동 단말기(100)는 복귀될 수 있다. 또한, 스토퍼(254)는 블록 어셈블리(201)에 삽입된 상태를 유지하면서, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b) 방향으로 이동될 수 있다. 따라서, 스토퍼(254)는 다른 블록들(210)과 동일평면을 형성하면서 평평하게 펴진 디스플레이(151)를 다른 블록들(210)과 함께 지지할 수 있다.Meanwhile, in a state in which the stopper 250 shown in FIG. 16 is interposed between the block assemblies 201 and the mobile terminal 100 is unfolded (the second state), the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are It may start to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 so that the four sides 101b and 102b get closer. While starting or performing such a rotation (that is, while the mobile terminal 100 is being converted from the second state in FIG. 16 to the first state), the first gears 310a and 310b are the first and second gears. It can rotate in directions (T1, T2) opposite to the rotation directions (R3, R4) of the bodies 101 and 102, respectively, and again, the second gears 320a and 320b are the rotational directions of the bodies 101 and 102 ( It can rotate in the same directions T3 and T4 as R3 and R4. By such rotation of the second gears 320a and 320b, the rack gear 254 can translate in the direction of the arrow A2 (that is, in the direction of the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a). have. Therefore, in the first state shown in FIG. 17, the stopper 254 is still inserted into the block assembly 201, and from the convex assembly 201 toward the display 151 (that is, the first and second It may protrude further toward the three surfaces 101a and 101b), and thus, the display 151 deformed with a large curvature may be supported together with other blocks 210. The operation of the stopper 250 and the hinge 200 connected thereto in the second state as described above is referred to as described in FIG. 8, and further description is omitted. In addition, in the first state shown in FIG. 17, in the first state of the mobile terminal 100, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotate in the opposite first and second directions R1 and R2. You can start. As shown in FIG. 17, during the start of the rotation or during the rotation (ie, the mobile terminal 100 is being converted from the first state of FIG. 17 to the second state of FIG. 16), the first gears (310a, 310b) can be rotated in directions (T3, T4) opposite to the rotational directions (R1, R2) of the first and second bodies (101, 102), respectively, and again the second gears (320a, 320b) ) May rotate in the same directions (T1, T2) as the rotation directions (R1, R1) of the bodies (101, 102). By such rotation of the second gears 320a and 320b, the rack gear 254 can be translated in the direction of the arrow A1 (ie, in the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b). Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be restored to the second state shown in FIG. 16. In addition, the stopper 254 may be moved in the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b while maintaining the state of being inserted into the block assembly 201. Accordingly, the stopper 254 may form the same plane as the other blocks 210 and support the flattened display 151 together with the other blocks 210.
다른 한편, 도 16에 도시된 스토퍼(250)가 블록 어셈블리(201)사이에 개재되고 이동 단말기(100)가 펼쳐진 상태(제 2 상태)에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 가까워지도록 제 1 및 제 2 방향(R1,R2)으로 회동하기 시작할 수 있다. 이와 같은 회동의 시작 또는 회동의 수행중(즉, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 16의 제 2 상태에서 제 3 상태로 전환되는중), 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회전방향(R1,R2)과는 반대되는 방향들(T3,T4)로 각각 회전할 수 있으며, 다시 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 몸체들(101,102)의 회전방향(R1,R2)와 같은 방향들(T1,T2)로 회전할 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)의 회전에 의해 랙 기어(254)는 화살표(A1)방향(즉, 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)방향)으로 병진운동(translate)할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 18에 도시된 제 3 상태에서, 스토퍼(254)는 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터 분리 또는 인출될 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 상태에서의 스토퍼(250) 및 이에 연계된 힌지(200)의 작동은 도 9에서 설명된 것이 참조되며, 추가적인 설명은 생략된다. 또한, 도 18에 도시된 이동 단말기(100)의 제 3 상태에서, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 반대방향인 제 3 및 제 4 방향(R3,R4)으로 회동하기 시작할 수 있다. 도 18에 도시된 바와 같이, 이와 같은 회동의 시작 또는 회동의 수행중(즉, 이동 단말기(100)가 도 18의 제 3 상태에서 도 16의 제 2 상태로 전환되는중), 제 1 기어들(310a,310b)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)의 회전방향(R3,R4)과는 반대되는 방향들(T1,T2)로 각각 회전할 수 있으며, 다시 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)은 몸체들(101,102)의 회전방향(R3,R4)와 같은 방향들(T3,T4)로 회전할 수 있다. 이와 같은 제 2 기어들(320a,320b)의 회전에 의해 랙 기어(254)는 화살표(A2)방향(즉, 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)방향)으로 병진운동할 수 있다. 따라서, 도 16에 도시된 제 2 상태로 이동 단말기(100)는 복귀될 수 있다. On the other hand, in a state in which the stopper 250 shown in FIG. 16 is interposed between the block assemblies 201 and the mobile terminal 100 is unfolded (the second state), the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are It may start to rotate in the first and second directions R1 and R2 so that the third surfaces 101a and 102a become close. While starting or performing such a rotation (that is, while the mobile terminal 100 is being converted from the second state in FIG. 16 to the third state), the first gears 310a and 310b are the first and second gears. It can rotate in directions (T3, T4) opposite to the rotation directions (R1, R2) of the bodies (101, 102), and again, the second gears (320a, 320b) are rotated in the direction of rotation of the bodies (101, 102) ( It can rotate in the same directions T1 and T2 as R1 and R2. By such rotation of the second gears 320a and 320b, the rack gear 254 can translate in the direction of the arrow A1 (that is, the direction of the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b). have. Accordingly, in the third state shown in FIG. 18, the stopper 254 may be separated or removed from the block assembly 201. The operation of the stopper 250 and the hinge 200 connected thereto in the second state as described above is referred to as described in FIG. In addition, in the third state of the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 18, the first and second bodies 101 and 102 may start to rotate in the third and fourth directions R3 and R4 which are opposite directions. As shown in FIG. 18, during the start of the rotation or during the execution of the rotation (ie, the mobile terminal 100 is being converted from the third state of FIG. 18 to the second state of FIG. 16), the first gears (310a, 310b) can be rotated in directions (T1, T2) opposite to the rotational directions (R3, R4) of the first and second bodies 101 and 102, respectively, and again, the second gears 320a, 320b ) May rotate in the same directions (T3, T4) as the rotation directions (R3, R4) of the bodies (101, 102). By the rotation of the second gears 320a and 320b, the rack gear 254 can be translated in the direction of the arrow A2 (ie, the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a). Accordingly, the mobile terminal 100 can be restored to the second state shown in FIG. 16.
이와 같은 일련의 작동들을 고려할 때, 연동 메커니즘(300)은, 이동 단말기(100)의 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 가까워지거나 마주하도록 회동하는 동안 힌지(200), 즉 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)를 향해 스토퍼(250)을 이동시킬 수 있다. 반대로, 연동 메커니즘(300)은, 이동 단말기(100)의 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 가까워지거나 마주하도록 회동하는 동안 힌지(200), 즉 이의 블록 어셈블리(201)로부터 멀어지게 스토퍼(250)를 이동시킬 수 있다. 이와 같은 운동의 결과로, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 2 및 제 4 면들(101b,102b)이 서로 마주하도록 회동될 때(즉, 제 1 상태), 스토퍼(250)를 블록 어셈블리(201), 또는 블록들(210)사이에 배치시킬 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 동일평면을 형성하도록 수평하게 배향될 때(즉, 제 2 상태)에도, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 여전히 스토퍼(250)를 블록 어셈블리(201), 또는 블록들(210)사이에 배치시킬 수 있다. 한편, 연동 메커니즘(300)은 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)가 제 1 및 제 3 면들(101a,102a)이 서로 마주하도록 회동될 때(즉, 제 3 상태), 스토퍼(250)를 블록 어셈블리(201), 또는 블록들(210)사이에 개재되지 않도록 이들로부터 분리 또는 인출시킬 수 있다. 스토퍼(250)을 앞서 언급된 위치들로 적절하게 이동시킴으로써 연동 어셈블리(300)는 제 1 및 제 2 몸체(101,102)를 의도된 방향들로 회동가능하게 하며 이에 따라 제 1-3 상태들을 달성할 수 있다. Considering such a series of operations, the interlocking mechanism 300 rotates so that the first and second bodies 101 and 102 of the mobile terminal 100 come close to or face the second and fourth surfaces 101b and 102b. The stopper 250 may be moved toward the hinge 200, that is, its block assembly 201. Conversely, the interlocking mechanism 300 is a hinge 200, that is, while the first and second bodies 101 and 102 of the mobile terminal 100 rotate so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a are closer to or facing each other. The stopper 250 may be moved away from its block assembly 201. As a result of this movement, the interlocking mechanism 300 stops when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the second and fourth sides 101b and 102b face each other (i.e., in the first state). The block 250 may be disposed between the block assembly 201 or the blocks 210. Further, even when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are oriented horizontally to form the same plane (i.e., in the second state), the interlocking mechanism 300 still attaches the stopper 250 to the block assembly 201, or It may be disposed between the blocks 210. Meanwhile, the interlocking mechanism 300 blocks the stopper 250 when the first and second bodies 101 and 102 are rotated so that the first and third surfaces 101a and 102a face each other (ie, in a third state). The assembly 201 or the blocks 210 may be separated from or withdrawn so that they are not interposed. By appropriately moving the stopper 250 to the aforementioned positions, the interlocking assembly 300 makes the first and second bodies 101 and 102 rotatable in the intended directions, thereby achieving the 1-3 states. I can.
상기의 상세한 설명은 모든 면에서 제한적으로 해석되어서는 아니되고 예시적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 본 출원의 범위는 첨부된 청구항의 합리적 해석에 의해 결정되어야 하고, 본 출원의 등가적 범위 내에서의 모든 변경은 본 발명의 범위에 포함된다.The above detailed description should not be construed as restrictive in all respects and should be considered as illustrative. The scope of this application should be determined by rational interpretation of the appended claims, and all changes within the equivalent scope of this application are included in the scope of the present invention.

Claims (25)

  1. 제 1 면(surface) 및 상기 제 1 면에 대향되는 제 2 면을 포함하는 제 1 몸체;A first body including a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface;
    상기 제 1 몸체에 회동가능하게 제공되며, 제 3 면 및 상기 제 3 면에 대향되는 제 4 면을 포함하는 제 2 몸체; A second body provided rotatably on the first body and including a third surface and a fourth surface opposite to the third surface;
    상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 결합시키며, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 각각 회동시키며 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 서로 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 제 3 및 제 4 방향들로 각각 회동시키도록 구성되는 힌지; 및 The first and second bodies are coupled, and the first and second bodies are rotated in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces are close to each other, and the second and fourth surfaces are close to each other. A hinge configured to rotate the first and second bodies in third and fourth directions, respectively; And
    상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들에 걸쳐 제공되며, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들이 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 마주하게 회동할 때 외부로 노출되며 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들이 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 마주하게 회동할 때 감춰지도록 구성되는 디스플레이를 포함하는 이동 단말기. It is provided over the first and third surfaces, and the first and second bodies are exposed to the outside when the second and fourth surfaces rotate to face each other, and the first and second bodies are exposed to the first and second bodies. Mobile terminal comprising a display configured to be hidden when the three sides rotate to face.
  2. 제 1 항에 있어서, The method of claim 1,
    상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 인접하는 측부들은 서로 소정 간격으로 이격되는 이동 단말기. Adjacent sides of the first and second bodies are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance.
  3. 제 1 항에 있어서, The method of claim 1,
    상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 측부들 사이에 배치되는 이동 단말기. The hinge is a mobile terminal disposed between the side portions of the first and second bodies.
  4. 제 1 항에 있어서, The method of claim 1,
    상기 힌지는:The hinge is:
    상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 길이방향을 연장되며 서로 나란하게 배열되는 다수개의 블록들(block)로 이루어지는 블록 어셈블리; 및 A block assembly consisting of a plurality of blocks arranged parallel to each other and extending in the longitudinal direction of the first and second bodies; And
    상기 블록들의 끝단들에 제공되며, 상기 블록들을 서로 연결하도록 구성되는 링크 어셈블리를 포함하는 이동 단말기. A mobile terminal provided at ends of the blocks and including a link assembly configured to connect the blocks to each other.
  5. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    각각의 상기 블록들은 상기 디스플레이를 지지하도록 구성되는 몸체와 상기 몸체의 양 끝단들로부터 각각 연장되는 축들을 포함하는 이동 단말기. Each of the blocks includes a body configured to support the display and axes extending from both ends of the body.
  6. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상대적으로 회동할 때, 상기 블록 어셈블리는 수축하도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. When the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces become close, the block assembly is configured to contract.
  7. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 마주하도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상대적으로 회동할 때, 상기 블록들은 이들 사이의 간격을 감소시키도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. When the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces face each other, the blocks are configured to reduce a gap therebetween.
  8. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상대적으로 회동할 때, 상기 블록 어셈블리는 확장되도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. When the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the first and third surfaces become close, the block assembly is configured to expand.
  9. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 가까워지도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상대적으로 회동할 때, 상기 블록들은 이들 사이의 간격을 증가시키도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. When the first and second bodies are relatively rotated so that the first and third surfaces become close, the blocks are configured to increase the spacing between them.
  10. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    각각의 상기 블록들은 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들을 향해 연장되면서 점차적으로 축소되는 단면을 갖도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. Each of the blocks is configured to have a cross section that gradually decreases while extending toward the second and fourth surfaces.
  11. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    상기 링크 어셈블리는:The link assembly is:
    서로 인접하는 한 쌍의 블록들을 연결하는 제 1 링크; 및 A first link connecting a pair of adjacent blocks; And
    상기 제 1 링크에 의해 각각 연결되면서 서로 인접하게 배치되는 두 쌍의 블록들을 서로 연결하는 제 2 링크를 포함하는 이동 단말기. A mobile terminal comprising a second link connecting two pairs of blocks disposed adjacent to each other while being connected by the first link, respectively.
  12. 제 4 항에 있어서, The method of claim 4,
    상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들 사이에서 이동 가능하게 구성되며, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 제 1 및 제 2 몸체를 상기 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 이동시키는 것을 선택적으로 허용하도록 구성되는 스토퍼(stopper)를 더 포함하는 이동 단말기. The hinge is configured to be movable between the first and second bodies, and selectively moving the first and second bodies in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other. The mobile terminal further comprising a stopper configured to allow.
  13. 제 12 항에 있어서, The method of claim 12,
    상기 스토퍼는 선택적으로 상기 블록들사이에 개재되도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. The stopper is configured to be selectively interposed between the blocks.
  14. 제 13 항에 있어서, The method of claim 13,
    상기 스토퍼는 상기 블록들 사이에 개재될 때, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 회동하는 것을 방지하도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. When the stopper is interposed between the blocks, the mobile terminal is configured to prevent the first and second bodies from rotating in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other.
  15. 제 12 항에 있어서, The method of claim 12,
    상기 스토퍼는 상기 블록들 사이에 개재되지 않을 때, 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 1 및 제 2 방향으로 회동하는 것을 허용하도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. When the stopper is not interposed between the blocks, the mobile terminal is configured to allow the first and second bodies to rotate in the first and second directions so that the first and third surfaces face each other.
  16. 제 12 항에 있어서, The method of claim 12,
    상기 힌지는 상기 스토퍼의 이동을 안내하도록 구성되는 홀더를 더 포함하는 이동 단말기. The hinge further comprises a holder configured to guide the movement of the stopper.
  17. 제 12 항에 있어서, The method of claim 12,
    상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들과 연결되며, 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들의 회동과 상기 스토퍼의 이동을 연동시키도록 구성되는 연동 메커니즘(interlock mechanism)을 더 포함하는 이동 단말기. The hinge is connected to the first and second bodies, the mobile terminal further comprising an interlock mechanism configured to interlock the rotation of the first and second bodies and the movement of the stopper.
  18. 제 17 항에 있어서, The method of claim 17,
    상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 2 및 제 4 면들이 서로 마주하도록 회동될 때, 상기 스토퍼를 상기 블록들 사이에 개재시키도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. The interlocking mechanism is configured to interpose the stopper between the blocks when the first and second bodies are rotated so that the second and fourth surfaces face each other.
  19. 제 17 항에 있어서, The method of claim 17,
    상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체가 상기 제 1 및 제 3 면들이 서로 마주하도록 회동될 때, 상기 스토퍼를 상기 블록들로부터 인출(withdraw) 하도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. The interlocking mechanism is configured to withdraw the stopper from the blocks when the first and second bodies are rotated so that the first and third surfaces face each other.
  20. 제 17 항에 있어서, The method of claim 17,
    상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 스토퍼를 직선 왕복운동시키도록 구성되는 기어트레인으로 이루어지는 이동 단말기. The interlocking mechanism is a mobile terminal comprising a gear train configured to linearly reciprocate the stopper.
  21. 제 17 항에 있어서, The method of claim 17,
    상기 연동 메커니즘은:The interlocking mechanism is:
    제 1 또는 제 2 몸체에 연결되며, 상기 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체의 회동시 함께 회동하도록 구성되는 제 1 기어; A first gear connected to the first or second body and configured to rotate together when the first or second body rotates;
    상기 제 1 기어와 상기 스토퍼에 각각 맞물리며, 상기 제 1 기어의 회전에 의해 회전하면서 상기 스토퍼를 이동시키는 제 2 기어를 포함하는 이동 단말기. And a second gear engaged with the first gear and the stopper, respectively, and moving the stopper while rotating by the rotation of the first gear.
  22. 제 21 항에 있어서, The method of claim 21,
    상기 스토퍼는 직선왕복운동을 위해 상기 제 2 기어와 맞물리는 랙 기어를 포함하는 이동 단말기.The stopper is a mobile terminal including a rack gear meshed with the second gear for linear reciprocating motion.
  23. 제 21 항에 있어서, The method of claim 21,
    상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 기어에 연결되며 상기 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체에 슬라이드 가능하게 결합되는 레버를 더 포함하는 이동 단말기. The interlocking mechanism further comprises a lever connected to the first gear and slidably coupled to the first or second body.
  24. 제 23 항에 있어서, The method of claim 23,
    상기 연동 메커니즘은 상기 제 1 또는 제 2 몸체에 제공되며 상기 레버를 슬라이드 가능하게 수용하는 브라켓을 더 포함하는 이동 단말기. The interlocking mechanism further comprises a bracket provided on the first or second body and slidably receiving the lever.
  25. 제 1 항에 있어서, The method of claim 1,
    상기 힌지는 상기 제 1 및 제 2 몸체들을 회동시키기 위해 소정의 곡률을 갖도록 변형되도록 구성되는 이동 단말기. The hinge is configured to be deformed to have a predetermined curvature in order to rotate the first and second bodies.
PCT/KR2019/009605 2019-08-01 2019-08-01 Mobile terminal WO2021020631A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/KR2019/009605 WO2021020631A1 (en) 2019-08-01 2019-08-01 Mobile terminal

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/KR2019/009605 WO2021020631A1 (en) 2019-08-01 2019-08-01 Mobile terminal

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021020631A1 true WO2021020631A1 (en) 2021-02-04

Family

ID=74228864

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2019/009605 WO2021020631A1 (en) 2019-08-01 2019-08-01 Mobile terminal

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021020631A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101329946B1 (en) * 2012-05-14 2013-11-14 주식회사 팬택 Mobile device
KR20170085537A (en) * 2014-11-11 2017-07-24 마이크로소프트 테크놀로지 라이센싱, 엘엘씨 Covered radius hinge
KR20180005476A (en) * 2016-07-06 2018-01-16 삼성전자주식회사 Foldable electronic device including flexible display
US20180275725A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Hinge assembly, rotation mechanism and foldable mobile terminal
KR20190013992A (en) * 2016-06-07 2019-02-11 항저우 암페놀 피닉스 텔레콤 파츠 컴퍼니 리미티드 Flexible Screen Hinge of Mobile Terminal, Hinge Device and Flexible Screen Mobile Terminal

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101329946B1 (en) * 2012-05-14 2013-11-14 주식회사 팬택 Mobile device
KR20170085537A (en) * 2014-11-11 2017-07-24 마이크로소프트 테크놀로지 라이센싱, 엘엘씨 Covered radius hinge
KR20190013992A (en) * 2016-06-07 2019-02-11 항저우 암페놀 피닉스 텔레콤 파츠 컴퍼니 리미티드 Flexible Screen Hinge of Mobile Terminal, Hinge Device and Flexible Screen Mobile Terminal
KR20180005476A (en) * 2016-07-06 2018-01-16 삼성전자주식회사 Foldable electronic device including flexible display
US20180275725A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Hinge assembly, rotation mechanism and foldable mobile terminal

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021060693A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021075608A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021112291A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021125391A1 (en) Roll-slide mobile terminal
WO2021141159A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021167133A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021187641A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2020218681A1 (en) Roll-slide mobile terminal
WO2020166766A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021025198A1 (en) Roll-slide mobile terminal
WO2021132744A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021141146A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021206191A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021149838A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2020262713A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021025197A1 (en) Roll-slide mobile terminal
WO2021182649A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021080041A1 (en) Electronic device comprising speaker module
WO2022014750A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021025181A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021045262A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021167236A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021002513A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021006372A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2021006371A1 (en) Mobile terminal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19939626

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19939626

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1